8/16/2019 36213-c60_s00-s09 http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/36213-c60s00-s09 1/160 Release 12 3GPP TS 36.213 V12.6.0 (2015-06) Foreword This Technical Specification (TS) has been produced by the 3 rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP). The contents of the present document are subject to continuing work within the TSG and may change following formal TSG approal. Should the TSG modify the contents of this present document! it will be re"released by the TSG with an identifying change of release date and an increase in ersion number as follows# $ersion %.y.& where# % the first digit# ' presented to TSG for information presented to TSG for approal 3 or greater indicates TSG approed document under change control. y the second digit is incremented for all changes of substance! i.e. technical enhancements! corrections! updates! etc. & the third digit is incremented when editorial only changes hae been incorporated in the document. 3GPP 6
This Technical Specification (TS) has been produced by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP).
The contents of the present document are subject to continuing work within the TSG and may change following formalTSG approal. Should the TSG modify the contents of this present document! it will be re"released by the TSG with anidentifying change of release date and an increase in ersion number as follows#
$ersion %.y.&
where#
% the first digit#
' presented to TSG for information
presented to TSG for approal
3 or greater indicates TSG approed document under change control.
y the second digit is incremented for all changes of substance! i.e. technical enhancements! corrections!updates! etc.
& the third digit is incremented when editorial only changes hae been incorporated in the document.
*or the purposes of the present document! the following symbols apply#
f n System frame number as defined in 34
sn Slot number within a radio frame as defined in 34
DLcells N Bumber of configured cells
+:> N +ownlink bandwidth configuration! e%pressed in units of >
sc N as defined in 34
-:> N -plink bandwidth configuration! e%pressed in units of
>sc N as defined in 34
-:symb N Bumber of S@"*+2/ symbols in an uplink slot as defined in 34
>sc N esource block si&e in the fre0uency domain! e%pressed as a number of subcarriers as defined in
34
sT >asic time unit as defined in 34
3.2 Abbreviations
*or the purposes of the present document! the abbreiations gien in T '.567 '4 and the following apply./n abbreiation defined in the present document takes precedence oer the definition of the same abbreiation! if any!in T '.567 '4.
@ell search is the procedure by which a -, ac0uires time and fre0uency synchroni&ation with a cell and detects the physical layer @ell 1+ of that cell. ,"-T/ cell search supports a scalable oerall transmission bandwidthcorresponding to 9 resource blocks and upwards.
The following signals are transmitted in the downlink to facilitate cell search# the primary and secondarysynchroni&ation signals.
/ -, may assume the antenna ports 6 ; 3 and the antenna port for the primaryFsecondary synchroni&ation signals of asering cell are 0uasi co"located (as defined in 34) with respect to +oppler shift and aerage delay.
4.2 !imin" synchronization
4.2.1 Radio lin# monitorin"
The downlink radio link 0uality of the primary cell shall be monitored by the -, for the purpose of indicating out"of"syncFin"sync status to higher layers.
1f the -, is configured with a S@G ''4! the downlink radio link 0uality of the PS@ell ''4 of the S@G shall bemonitored by the -, for the purpose of indicating out"of"syncFin"sync status to higher layers.
1n non"+A mode operation! the physical layer in the -, shall eery radio frame assess the radio link 0uality!ealuated oer the preious time period defined in '64! against thresholds (Eout and Ein) defined by releant tests in'64.
1n +A mode operation! the physical layer in the -, shall at least once eery +A period assess the radio link 0uality!
ealuated oer the preious time period defined in '64! against thresholds (Eout and Ein) defined by releant tests in
'64.
1f higher"layer signalling indicates certain subframes for restricted radio link monitoring! the radio link 0uality shall not be monitored in any subframe other than those indicated.
The physical layer in the -, shall in radio frames where the radio link 0uality is assessed indicate out"of"sync to higherlayers when the radio link 0uality is worse than the threshold Eout. hen the radio link 0uality is better than thethreshold Ein! the physical layer in the -, shall in radio frames where the radio link 0uality is assessed indicate in"syncto higher layers.
4.2.2 $nter%cell synchronization
Bo functionality is specified in this subclause in this release.
4.2.3 !ransmission timin" ad&ustments
-pon reception of a timing adance command for a T/G containing the primary cell or PS@ell! the -, shall adjustuplink transmission timing for P-@@DFP-S@DFSS of the primary cell or PS@ell based on the receied timingadance command.
The -: transmission timing for P-S@DFSS of a secondary cell is the same as the primary cell if the secondary celland the primary cell belong to the same T/G. 1f the primary cell in a T/G has a frame structure type ' and a secondary
cell in the same T/G has a frame structure type ! -, may assume that N TA H 9<.
1f the -, is configured with a S@G! the -: transmission timing for P-S@DFSS of a secondary cell other than thePS@ell is the same as the PScell if the secondary cell and the PS@ell belong to the same T/G.
-pon reception of a timing adance command for a T/G not containing the primary cell or PS@ell! if all the seringcells in the T/G hae the same frame structure type! the -, shall adjust uplink transmission timing for P-S@DFSS ofall the secondary cells in the T/G based on the receied timing adance command where the -: transmission timingfor P-S@D FSS is the same for all the secondary cells in the T/G.
-pon reception of a timing adance command for a T/G not containing the primary cell or PS@ell! if a sering cell inthe T/G has a different frame structure type compared to the frame structure type of another sering cell in the sameT/G! the -, shall adjust uplink transmission timing for P-S@DFSS of all the secondary cells in the T/G by using
N TAoffset I 9< regardless of the frame structure type of the sering cells and based on the receied timing adance
command where the -: transmission timing for P-S@D FSS is the same for all the secondary cells in the T/G. N TAoffset
is described in 34.
The timing adance command for a T/G indicates the change of the uplink timing relatie to the current uplink timing
for the T/G as multiples of '9 sT . The start timing of the random access preamble is specified in 34.
1n case of random access response! an ''"bit timing adance command ?4! T A! for a T/G indicates N TA alues by inde%
alues of T A I 6! '! ! ...! '?! where an amount of the time alignment for the T/G is gien by N TA I T A ×'9. N TA is
defined in 34.
1n other cases! a 9"bit timing adance command ?4! T A! for a T/G indicates adjustment of the current N TA alue! N TA,old !
to the new N TA alue! N TA,new! by inde% alues of T A I 6! '! !...! 93! where N TA,new I N TA,old J (T A −3')×'9. Dere!
adjustment of N TA alue by a positie or a negatie amount indicates adancing or delaying the uplink transmission
timing for the T/G by a gien amount respectiely.
*or a timing adance command receied on subframe n! the corresponding adjustment of the uplink transmission timingshall apply from the beginning of subframe n+6 . *or sering cells in the same T/G! when the -,Ks uplinkP-@@DFP-S@DFSS transmissions in subframe n and subframe nJ' are oerlapped due to the timing adjustment! the-, shall complete transmission of subframe n and not transmit the oerlapped part of subframe nJ'.
1f the receied downlink timing changes and is not compensated or is only partly compensated by the uplink timingadjustment without timing adance command as specified in '64! the -, changes N TA accordingly.
4.3 !imin" for Secondary ell Activation ' (eactivation
hen a -, receies an actiation command ?4 for a secondary cell in subframe n! the corresponding actions in ?4shall be applied no later than the minimum re0uirement defined in '64 and no earlier than subframe nJ?! e%cept for thefollowing#
" the actions related to @S1 reporting
" the actions related to the sCellDeactivationTimer associated with the secondary cell ?4
which shall be applied in subframe n+8.
hen a -, receies a deactiation command ?4 for a secondary cell or the sCellDeactivationTimer associated with thesecondary cell e%pires in subframe n! the corresponding actions in ?4 shall apply no later than the minimumre0uirement defined in '64! e%cept for the actions related to @S1 reporting which shall be applied in subframe n+8.
+ownlink power control determines the ,nergy Per esource ,lement (,P,). The term resource element energydenotes the energy prior to @P insertion. The term resource element energy also denotes the aerage energy taken oer
all constellation points for the modulation scheme applied. -plink power control determines the aerage power oer aS@"*+2/ symbol in which the physical channel is transmitted.
).1 +plin# power control
-plink power control controls the transmit power of the different uplink physical channels.
*or P-S@D! the transmit power )(L!P-S@D i c defined in subclause 7.'.'! is first scaled by the ratio of the number of
antennas ports with a non"&ero P-S@D transmission to the number of configured antenna ports for the transmissionscheme. The resulting scaled power is then split e0ually across the antenna ports on which the non"&ero P-S@D istransmitted.
*or P-@@D or SS! the transmit power )(LP-@@D i ! defined in subclause 7.'.'.'! or )(L
cSS! i is split e0ually
across the configured antenna ports for P-@@D or SS. )(LcSS! i is the linear alue of )(cSS! i defined in
subclause 7.'.3.
/ cell wide oerload indicator (M1) and a Digh 1nterference 1ndicator (D11) to control -: interference are defined in 54.
*or a sering cell with frame structure type '! a -, is not e%pected to be configured with!plin"owerControlDedicated#v$%&'.
).1.1 *hysical uplin# shared channel
1f the -, is configured with a S@G! the -, shall apply the procedures described in this clause for both 2@G and S@G
" hen the procedures are applied for 2@G! the terms Nsecondary cellO! Nsecondary cellsO ! Nsering cellO! NseringcellsO in this clause refer to secondary cell! secondary cells! sering cell! sering cells belonging to the 2@Grespectiely.
" hen the procedures are applied for S@G! the terms Nsecondary cellO! Nsecondary cellsO! Nsering cellO! NseringcellsO in this clause refer to secondary cell! secondary cells (not including PS@ell)! sering cell! sering cells belonging to the S@G respectiely. The term Nprimary cellO in this clause refers to the PS@ell of the S@G.
).1.1.1 +, behaviour
The setting of the -, Transmit power for a Physical -plink Shared @hannel (P-S@D) transmission is defined asfollows.
1f the -, transmits P-S@D without a simultaneous P-@@D for the sering cell c ! then the -, transmit power
)(!P-S@D i c for P-S@D transmission in subframe i for the sering cell c is gien by
+∆+⋅++=
)()()()())((log'6
)!(min)(
cT*!cMP-S@D!cP-S@D!'6
!@2/AcP-S@D!
i f i L ( ( i )
i i
ccc
c
α
d>m4
1f the -, transmits P-S@D simultaneous with P-@@D for the sering cell c ! then the -, transmit power
)(!P-S@D i c for the P-S@D transmission in subframe i for the sering cell c is gien by
1f the -, is not transmitting P-S@D for the sering cell c! for the accumulation of TP@ command receied with +@1
format 3F3/ for P-S@D! the -, shall assume that the -, transmit power )(!P-S@D i c for the P-S@D transmission
in subframe i for the sering cell c is computed by
{ })()'()'()!(min)( MP-S@D!c@2/A!cP-S@D!c i f L i i ccc +⋅+= α d>m4
where!
" )(c@2/A! i is the configured -, transmit power defined in 94 in subframe i for sering cell c and
)(Lc@2/A! i is the linear alue of )(c@2/A! i . 1f the -, transmits P-@@D without P-S@D in subframe i
for the sering cell c! for the accumulation of TP@ command receied with +@1 format 3F3/ for P-S@D! the -,
shall assume )(c@2/A! i as gien by subclause 7.'..'. 1f the -, does not transmit P-@@D and P-S@D insubframe i for the sering cell c! for the accumulation of TP@ command receied with +@1 format 3F3/ for
P-S@D! the -, shall compute )(c@2/A! i assuming 2PI6d>! /"2PI6d>! P"2PI6d> and ∆T@ I6d>!
where 2P! /"2P! P"2P and ∆T@ are defined in 94.
" )(LP-@@D i is the linear alue of )(P-@@D i defined in subclause 7.'..'
" )(cP-S@D! i ) is the bandwidth of the P-S@D resource assignment e%pressed in number of resource blocks
alid for subframe i and sering cell c .
" 1f the -, is configured with higher layer parameter !plin"owerControlDedicated#v$%&' for sering cell c
and if subframe i belongs to uplink power control subframe set as indicated by the higher layer parameter
tpc#*uframe*et#r$%!
" when jI6! MP-S@D!c M-,P-S@D!c! MBM21B/:P-S@D!c !(6) (6) (6) = + ! where jI6 is used for P-S@D
(re)transmissions corresponding to a semi"persistent grant. M-,P-S@D!c!(6) and MBM21B/:P-S@D!c! (6)
are the parameters p'#!#!*C-#ersistent#*uframe*et%#r$% and p'#Nominal!*C-#ersistent
#*uframe*et%#r$% respectiely proided by higher layers! for each sering cell c .
" when jI'! MP-S@D!c M-,P-S@D!c! MBM21B/:P-S@D!c!(') (') (') = + ! where jI' is used for P-S@D
(re)transmissions corresponding to a dynamic scheduled grant. M-,P-S@D!c! (') and
MBM21B/:P-S@D!c!(') are the parameters p'#!#!*C-#*uframe*et%#r$% and p'#Nominal!*C-#
*uframe*et%#r$% respectiely! proided by higher layers for sering cell c .
" when jI! )()()( P-S@D!cMBM21B/: !cM-,P-S@DMP-S@D!c += where
6)(!cM-,P-S@D = and 3 MP,P-S@D!cMBM21B/: )( )s. R,A)/L, ∆+= ! where the
parameter preamle0nitialReceivedTaretower ?4 ( MP., ) and 3 )s. RA)/L ∆ are signalled from
higher layers for sering cell c ! where jI is used for P-S@D (re)transmissions corresponding to the
random access response grant.
Mtherwise
" )(cMP-S@D! ( is a parameter composed of the sum of a component )(cP-S@D!MBM21B/: ( proided
from higher layers for (1' and $ and a component )(c!M-,P-S@D ( proided by higher layers for (1'
and $ for sering cell c . *or P-S@D (re)transmissions corresponding to a semi"persistent grant then (1' !
for P-S@D (re)transmissions corresponding to a dynamic scheduled grant then (1$ and for P-S@D
(re)transmissions corresponding to the random access response grant then (1%. 6)(!cM-,P-S@D = and
3 MP,cP-S@D!MBM21B/: )( )s. RA)/L ∆+= ! where the parameter
preamle0nitialReceivedTaretower ?4 ( MP., ) and 3 )s. RA)/L ∆ are signalled from higher layers
for sering cell c .
" 1f the -, is configured with higher layer parameter !plin"owerControlDedicated#v$%&' for sering cell c and if subframe i belongs to uplink power control subframe set as indicated by the higher layer parameter
tpc#*uframe*et#r$%!
" *or (I6 or '! { }'!5.6!?.6!=.6!9.6!7.6!<.6!6)( ! ∈= cc ( α α . !cα is the parameter alpha#
*uframe*et%#r$% proided by higher layers for each sering cell c .
" *or (I! ( ) 'c (α = .
Mtherwise
" *or ( I6 or $! { }'!5.6!?.6!=.6!9.6!7.6!<.6!6∈cα is a 3"bit parameter proided by higher layers
for sering cell c . *or (I! .')( = (cα
" c L is the downlink path loss estimate calculated in the -, for sering cell c in d> and c L I
reference*inalower ; higher layer filtered SP! where reference*inalower is proided by higher layersand SP is defined in 74 for the reference sering cell and the higher layer filter configuration is defined in
''4 for the reference sering cell. 1f sering cell c belongs to a T/G containing the primary cell then! for the
uplink of the primary cell! the primary cell is used as the reference sering cell for determiningreference*inalower and higher layer filtered SP. *or the uplink of the secondary cell! the sering cell
configured by the higher layer parameter pathlossReferenceLin"in defined in ''4 is used as the reference
sering cell for determining reference*inalower and higher layer filtered SP. 1f sering cell c belongs to
a T/G containing the PS@ell then! for the uplink of the PS@ell! the PS@ell is used as the reference sering cellfor determining reference*inalower and higher layer filtered SP for the uplink of the secondary cell other
than PS@ell! the sering cell configured by the higher layer parameter pathlossReferenceLin"in defined in ''4is used as the reference sering cell for determining reference*inalower and higher layer filtered SP. 1f
sering cell c belongs to a T/G not containing the primary cell or PS@ell then sering cell c is used as the
reference sering cell for determining reference*inalower and higher layer filtered SP.
" ( )( ) !*C- offset
2 /R, cT3
si β ⋅−=∆ ⋅'log'6)( '6! for 7.'=* 2 and 6 for 6=* 2 where * 2 is gien by
the parameter delta)C*#naled proided by higher layers for each sering cell c . /R and !*C- offset β !
for each sering cell c ! are computed as below. 6=* 2 for transmission mode .
" ,@E1 F N 4 /R = for control data sent ia P-S@D without -:"S@D data and ,
'
6
F N 2 r
C
r
∑−
=
for other
cases.
" where C is the number of code blocks! r 2 is the si&e for code block r ! @E14 is the number of
@E1FP21 bits including @@ bits and , N is the number of resource elements determined as
initial"P-S@Dsymb, N ) N
initial !*C- sc ⋅= −
! where C ! r 2 !
initial !*C-
sc ) − and
initial"P-S@D
symb N are
defined in <4.
" !*C- C50
offset offset β β = for control data sent ia P-S@D without -:"S@D data and ' for other cases.
" cP-S@D!δ is a correction alue! also referred to as a TP@ command and is included in P+@@DF,P+@@D with
+@1 format 6F< for sering cell c or jointly coded with other TP@ commands in P+@@D with +@1 format 3F3/
whose @@ parity bits are scrambled with TP@"P-S@D"BT1. 1f the -, is configured with higher layer
parameter !plin"owerControlDedicated#v$%&' for sering cell c and if subframe i belongs to uplink power
control subframe set as indicated by the higher layer parameter tpc#*uframe*et#r$%, the current P-S@D
power control adjustment state for sering cell c is gien by )(! i f c ! and the -, shall use )(! i f c instead
of )(i f c to determine )(!P-S@D i c . Mtherwise! the current P-S@D power control adjustment state for
sering cell c is gien by )(i f c . )(! i f c and )(i f c are defined by#
" )()'()( P-S@DcP-S@D! 2 ii f i f cc −+−= δ and )()'()( P-S@DP-S@D!c!! 2 ii f i f cc −+−= δ if
accumulation is enabled based on the parameter Accumulation#enaled proided by higher layers or if the
TP@ command cP-S@D!δ is included in a P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6 for sering cell c where
the @@ is scrambled by the Temporary @"BT1
" where )( P-S@DcP-S@D! 2 i −δ was signalled on P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< or P+@@D
with +@1 format 3F3/ on subframe !*C- 2 i − ! and where )6(c f is the first alue after reset of
accumulation.
" The alue of !*C- 2 is
" *or *++ or *++"T++ and sering cell frame structure type '! !*C- 2 I <
" *or T++! if the -, is configured with more than one sering cell and the T++ -:F+: configuration
of at least two configured sering cells is not the same! or if the -, is configured with the parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for at least one sering cell! or for *++"T++ and sering cell framestructure type ! the 8T++ -:F+: configuration8 refers to the -:"reference -:F+: configuration
(defined in subclause ?.6) for sering cell c .
" *or T++ -:F+: configurations '"9! !*C- 2
is gien in Table 7.'.'.'"'
" *or T++ -:F+: configuration 6
" 1f the P-S@D transmission in subframe % or is scheduled with a P+@@DF,P+@@D of +@1
format 6F< in which the :S> of the -: inde% is set to '! !*C- 2 I =
" *or all other P-S@D transmissions! !*C- 2 is gien in Table 7.'.'.'"'.
" *or sering cell c the -, attempts to decode a P+@@DF,P+@@D of +@1 format 6F< with the -,Ks @"
BT1 or +@1 format 6 for SPS @"BT1 and a P+@@D of +@1 format 3F3/ with this -,Ks TP@"P-S@D"
BT1 in eery subframe e%cept when in +A or where sering cell c is deactiated.
" 1f +@1 format 6F< for sering cell c and +@1 format 3F3/ are both detected in the same subframe! then
the -, shall use the cP-S@D!δ proided in +@1 format 6F<.
" 6cP-S@D! =δ d> for a subframe where no TP@ command is decoded for sering cell c or where +A
occurs or i is not an uplink subframe in T++ or *++"T++ and sering cell c frame structure type .
" The cP-S@D!δ d> accumulated alues signalled on P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< are gien in
Table 7.'.'.'". 1f the P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6 is alidated as a SPS actiation or release
P+@@DF,P+@@D! then cP-S@D!δ is 6d>.
" The P-S@Dδ d> accumulated alues signalled on P+@@D with +@1 format 3F3/ are one of S,T' gien
in Table 7.'.'.'" or S,T gien in Table 7.'.'.'"3 as determined by the parameter TC#0nde& proided by higher layers.
" 1f -, has reached )(c@2/A! i for sering cell c ! positie TP@ commands for sering cell c shall
not be accumulated
" 1f -, has reached minimum power! negatie TP@ commands shall not be accumulated
" 1f the -, is not configured with higher layer parameter !plin"owerControlDedicated#v$%&' for sering
" *or sering cell c ! when c!M-,P-S@D alue is changed by higher layers
" *or sering cell c ! when the -, receies random access response message for sering cell c
" 1f the -, is configured with higher layer parameter !plin"owerControlDedicated#v$%&' for sering cellc !
" the -, shall reset accumulation corresponding to )(∗c f for sering cell c
" when c!M-,P-S@D alue is changed by higher layers
" when the -, receies random access response message for sering cell c
" the -, shall reset accumulation corresponding to )(! ∗c f for sering cell c
" when !c!M-,P-S@D alue is changed by higher layers
" 1f the -, is configured with higher layer parameter !plin"owerControlDedicated#v$%&' for sering cell
c and
" if subframe i belongs to uplink power control subframe set as indicated by the higher layer
parameter tpc#*uframe*et#r$% )'()( −= i f i f cc
" if subframe i does not belong to uplink power control subframe set as indicated by the higher layer
parameter tpc#*uframe*et#r$% )'()( !! −= i f i f cc
" )()( P-S@DcP-S@D! 2 ii f c −= δ and ! P-S@D!c P-S@D( ) ( )c f i i 2 δ = − if accumulation is not enabled for
sering cell c based on the parameter Accumulation#enaled proided by higher layers
" where )( P-S@DcP-S@D! 2 i −δ was signalled on P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< for sering cell
c on subframe !*C- 2 i −
" The alue of !*C- 2 is
" *or *++ or *++"T++ and sering cell frame structure type '!
!*C- 2 I <
" *or T++! if the -, is configured with more than one sering cell and the T++ -:F+: configurationof at least two configured sering cells is not the same! or if the -, is configured with the parameter
0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for at least one sering cell! or *++"T++ and sering cell framestructure type ! the 8T++ -:F+: configuration8 refers to the -:"reference -:F+: configuration
(defined in subclause ?.6) for sering cell c .
" *or T++ -:F+: configurations '"9! !*C- 2 is gien in Table 7.'.'.'"'.
" *or T++ -:F+: configuration 6
" 1f the P-S@D transmission in subframe % or is scheduled with a P+@@DF,P+@@D of +@1
format 6F< in which the :S> of the -: inde% is set to '! !*C- 2 I =
" *or all other P-S@D transmissions! !*C- 2
is gien in Table 7.'.'.'"'.
" The cP-S@D!δ d> absolute alues signalled on P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< are gien in
Table 7.'.'.'". 1f the P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6 is alidated as a SPS actiation or release
*or a -, not configured with a S@G! note that )(iw alues are the same across sering cells when 6)( >iw but for
certain sering cells )(iw may be &ero.
1f the -, is not configured with an S@G! and if the -, has simultaneous P-@@D and P-S@D transmission with -@1on sering cell j and P-S@D transmission without -@1 in any of the remaining sering cells! and the total transmit
power of the -, would e%ceed )(L i C)A7 ! the -, obtains )(L!P-S@D i c according to
)(L)(L)!(Lmin)(LP-@@D@2/A!P-S@D!P-S@D i i i i ( ( −=
and
( ))(L)(L)(L)(L)( !P-S@DP-@@D@2/A!P-S@D i i i i iw (
(c
c −−≤⋅∑≠
1f the -, is not configured with a S@G! and
" 1f the -, is configured with multiple T/Gs! and if the P-@@DFP-S@D transmission of the -, on subframe i
for a gien sering cell in a T/G oerlaps some portion of the first symbol of the P-S@D transmission on
subframe '+i for a different sering cell in another T/G the -, shall adjust its total transmission power to note%ceed C)A7 on any oerlapped portion.
" 1f the -, is configured with multiple T/Gs! and if the P-S@D transmission of the -, on subframe i for a
gien sering cell in a T/G oerlaps some portion of the first symbol of the P-@@D transmission on subframe
'+i for a different sering cell in another T/G the -, shall adjust its total transmission power to not e%ceed
C)A7 on any oerlapped portion.
" 1f the -, is configured with multiple T/Gs! and if the SS transmission of the -, in a symbol on subframe i
for a gien sering cell in a T/G oerlaps with the P-@@DFP-S@D transmission on subframe i or subframe
'+i for a different sering cell in the same or another T/G the -, shall drop SS if its total transmission
power e%ceeds C)A7 on any oerlapped portion of the symbol.
" 1f the -, is configured with multiple T/Gs and more than sering cells! and if the SS transmission of the -,
in a symbol on subframe i for a gien sering cell oerlaps with the SS transmission on subframe i for a
different sering cell(s) and with P-S@DFP-@@D transmission on subframe i or subframe '+i for another
sering cell(s) the -, shall drop the SS transmissions if the total transmission power e%ceeds C)A7 on any
oerlapped portion of the symbol.
" 1f the -, is configured with multiple T/Gs! the -, shall! when re0uested by higher layers! to transmit P/@Din a secondary sering cell in parallel with SS transmission in a symbol on a subframe of a different sering
cell belonging to a different T/G! drop SS if the total transmission power e%ceeds C)A7 on any oerlapped
portion in the symbol.
" 1f the -, is configured with multiple T/Gs! the -, shall! when re0uested by higher layers! to transmit P/@Din a secondary sering cell in parallel with P-S@DFP-@@D in a different sering cell belonging to a differentT/G! adjust the transmission power of P-S@DFP-@@D so that its total transmission power does not e%ceed
C)A7 on the oerlapped portion.
).1.1.2 *ower headroom
There are two types of -, power headroom reports defined. / -, power headroom - is alid for subframe i for
sering cell c .
1f the -, is configured with a S@G! and if the higher layer parameter phr#)ode4therC9#r$% for a @G indicatesNirtualO! for power headroom reports transmitted on that @G! the -, shall compute PD assuming that it does not
transmit P-S@DFP-@@D on any sering cell of the other @G.
" *or computing power headroom for cells belonging to 2@G! the term Nsering cellO in this subclause refers tosering cell belonging to the 2@G.
" *or computing power headroom for cells belonging to S@G! the term Nsering cellO in this subclause refers tosering cell belonging to the S@G. The term Nprimary cellO in this subclause refers to the PS@ell of the S@G.
Type '#
1f the -, transmits P-S@D without P-@@D in subframe i for sering cell c ! power headroom for a Type ' report is
computed using
{ })()()()())((log'6)()( cT*!cMP-S@D!cP-S@D!'6!@2/Actype'! i f i L ( ( i ) i i - cccc +∆+⋅++−= α
d>4
where! ( )i c!@2/A ! )(cP-S@D! i ) ! )(cMP-S@D! ( ! )( (cα ! c L ! )(!T* ic∆ and )(i f c are defined in
subclause 7.'.'.'.
1f the -, transmits P-S@D with P-@@D in subframe i for sering cell c ! power headroom for a Type ' report is
computed using
{ })()()()())((log'6)(Q
)( cT*!cMP-S@D!cP-S@D!'6!@2/Actype'! i f i L ( ( i ) i i - cccc +∆+⋅++−= α
d>4
where! )(cP-S@D! i ) ! )(cMP-S@D! ( ! )( (cα ! c L ! )(!T* ic∆ and )(i f c are defined in subclause 7.'.'.'.
)(Q
!@2/A i c is computed based on the re0uirements in 94 assuming a P-S@D only transmission in subframe i . *or
this case! the physical layer deliers )(Q
!@2/A i c instead of )(!@2/A i c to higher layers.
1f the -, does not transmit P-S@D in subframe i for sering cell c ! power headroom for a Type ' report is
computed using
{ })()'()'()(Q
)( cMP-S@D!!@2/Actype'! i f L i i - cccc +⋅+−= α d>4
where! )(Q
c@2/A! i is computed assuming 2PI6d>! /"2PI6d>! P"2PI6d> and ∆T@ I6d>! where 2P ! /"
2P! P"2P and ∆T@ are defined in 94. )'(cMP-S@D! ! )'(cα ! c L ! and )(i f c are defined in subclause
7.'.'.'.
Type #
1f the -, transmits P-S@D simultaneous with P-@@D in subframe i for the primary cell! power headroom for a Type
! i cC)A7 is computed assuming 2PI6d>! /"2PI6d>! P"2PI6d> and ∆T@ I6d>! where 2P !
/"2P! P"2P and ∆T@ are defined in 94! )'(cMP-S@D! ! )'(cα and )(i f c are the primary cell parameters as
defined in subclause 7.'.'.' and MP-@@D ! c L and )(i . are defined in subclause 7.'..'.
The power headroom shall be rounded to the closest alue in the range <6 "34 d> with steps of ' d> and is deliered by the physical layer to higher layers.
1f the -, is configured with higher layer parameter !plin"owerControlDedicated#v$%&' for sering cell c and if
subframe i belongs to uplink power control subframe set as indicated by the higher layer parameter tpc#
*uframe*et#r$%, the -, shall use )(! i f c instead of )(i f c to compute )(type'!c i - and )(type!c i - for
subframe i and sering cell c ! where )(! i f c is defined in subclause 7.'.'.'.
).1.2 *hysical uplin# control channel
1f the -, is configured with a S@G! the -, shall apply the procedures described in this subclause for both 2@G andS@G.
" hen the procedures are applied for 2@G! the term Nsering cellO in this subclause refers to sering cell
belonging to the 2@G.
" hen the procedures are applied for S@G! the term Nsering cellO in this subclause refers to sering cell belonging to the S@G. The term Nprimary cellO in this subclause refers to the PS@ell of the S@G.
).1.2.1 +, behaviour
1f sering cell c is the primary cell! the setting of the -, Transmit power P-@@D for the physical uplink control
channel (P-@@D) transmission in subframe i for sering cell c is defined by
( )( ) ( ) ( )
+∆+∆+++
=i . 3 3 nnnh L
i i
T&D*R -AR5C50 c )K(!
)!(min
*P-@@D!6P-@@D
c@2/A!P-@@D d>m4
1f the -, is not transmitting P-@@D for the primary cell! for the accumulation of TP@ command for P-@@D! the -,
shall assume that the -, transmit power P-@@D for P-@@D in subframe i is computed by
( ) ( ){ }i . L i i c ++= 6P-@@D@2/A!cP-@@D )!(min d>m4
where
" )(c@2/A! i is the configured -, transmit power defined in 94 in subframe i for sering cell c . 1f the -,
transmits P-S@D without P-@@D in subframe i for the sering cell c! for the accumulation of TP@ command
for P-@@D! the -, shall assume)(
c@2/A!
i as gien by subclause 7.'.'.'. 1f the -, does not transmit
P-@@D and P-S@D in subframe i for the sering cell c! for the accumulation of TP@ command for P-@@D!
the -, shall compute )(c@2/A! i assuming 2PI6d>! /"2PI6d>! P"2PI6d> and ∆T@ I6d>! where
2P! /"2P! P"2P and ∆T@ are defined in 94.
" The parameter *P-@@D ( ) 3 ∆ is proided by higher layers. ,ach *P-@@D ( ) 3 ∆ alue corresponds to a P-@@D
format ( 3 ) relatie to P-@@D format 'a! where each P-@@D format ( 3 ) is defined in Table 7.<"' of 34.
" 1f the -, is configured by higher layers to transmit P-@@D on two antenna ports! the alue of )K( 3 T&D∆ is
proided by higher layers where each P-@@D format 3: is defined in Table 7.<"' of 34 otherwise!
6)K( =∆ 3 T&D .
" )!!( *R -AR5C50 nnnh is a P-@@D format dependent alue! where C50 n corresponds to the number of
information bits for the channel 0uality information defined in subclause 7..3.3 in <4. *Rn I ' if subframe i is
configured for S for the -, not haing any associated transport block for -:"S@D! otherwise *Rn I6. 1f the
-, is configured with more than one sering cell! or the -, is configured with one sering cell and transmitting
using P-@@D format 3! the alue of -AR5n is defined in subclause '6.' otherwise! -AR5n is the number of
D/E"/@C bits sent in subframe i.
" *or P-@@D format '!'a and 'b 6!! =*R -AR5C50 nnnh
" *or P-@@D format 'b with channel selection! if the -, is configured with more than one sering cell!
')!!(
−= -AR5
*R -AR5C50
nnnnh ! otherwise! 6!! =*R -AR5C50 nnnh
" *or P-@@D format ! a! b and normal cyclic prefi%
( )
≥
=
otherwise6
<if <
log'6! '6
!C50
C50
*R -AR5C50 n
n
nnnh
" *or P-@@D format and e%tended cyclic prefi%
( )
≥+
+=
otherwise6
<if <
log'6! '6
! -AR5C50
-AR5C50
*R -AR5C50 nn
nn
nnnh
" *or P-@@D format 3 and when -, transmits D/E"/@CFS without periodic @S1!
" 1f the -, is configured by higher layers to transmit P-@@D format 3 on two antenna ports! or if the -,transmits more than '' bits of D/E"/@CFS
3
')!!(
−+= *R -AR5
*R -AR5C50
nnnnnh
" Mtherwise
')!!(
−+= *R -AR5
*R -AR5C50
nnnnnh
" *or P-@@D format 3 and when -, transmits D/E"/@CFS and periodic @S1!
" 1f the -, is configured by higher layers to transmit P-@@D format 3 on two antenna ports! or if the -,transmits more than '' bits of D/E"/@CFS and @S1
" MP-@@D is a parameter composed of the sum of a parameter P-@@DMBM21B/: proided by higher
layers and a parameter M-,P-@@D proided by higher layers.
" P-@@Dδ is a -, specific correction alue! also referred to as a TP@ command! included in a P+@@D with +@1
format '/F'>F'+F'F/FF>F@F+ for the primary cell! or included in an ,P+@@D with +@1 format'/F'>F'+F'F/FF>F@F+ for the primary cell! or sent jointly coded with other -, specific P-@@Dcorrection alues on a P+@@D with +@1 format 3F3/ whose @@ parity bits are scrambled with TP@"P-@@D"
BT1.
" 1f a -, is not configured for ,P+@@D monitoring! the -, attempts to decode a P+@@D of +@1 format 3F3/with the -,Ks TP@"P-@@D"BT1 and one or seeral P+@@Ds of +@1 format '/F'>F'+F'F/FF>F@F+with the -,Ks @"BT1 or SPS @"BT1 on eery subframe e%cept when in +A.
" 1f a -, is configured for ,P+@@D monitoring! the -, attempts to decode
" a P+@@D of +@1 format 3F3/ with the -,Ks TP@"P-@@D"BT1 and one or seeral P+@@Ds of +@1format '/F'>F'+F'F/FF>F@F+ with the -,Ks @"BT1 or SPS @"BT1 as described in subclause5.'.'! and
" one or seeral ,P+@@Ds of +@1 format '/F'>F'+F'F/FF>F@F+ with the -,Ks @"BT1 or SPS @"BT1! as described in subclause 5.'.<.
" 1f the -, decodes
" a P+@@D with +@1 format '/F'>F'+F'F/FF>F@F+ or
" an ,P+@@D with +@1 format '/F'>F'+F'F/FF>F@F+
for the primary cell and the corresponding detected BT1 e0uals the @"BT1 or SPS @"BT1 of the -,and the TP@ field in the +@1 format is not used to determine the P-@@D resource as in subclause '6.'!
the -, shall use the P-@@Dδ proided in that P+@@DF,P+@@D.
,lse
" if the -, decodes a P+@@D with +@1 format 3F3/! the -, shall use the P-@@Dδ proided in that
P+@@D
else the -, shall set P-@@Dδ I 6 d>.
"
'
6
( ) ( ') ( ) )
!CC- mm
i i i " δ −
== − + −∑ where)(i .
is the current P-@@D power control adjustment state and
where ( )6 . is the first alue after reset.
" *or *++ or *++"T++ and primary cell frame structure type '! '= ) and <6 =" .
" *or T++! alues of ) and m" are gien in Table '6.'.3.'"'! where the R-:F+: configuration in
Table '6.'.3.'"' corresponds to the eimta#-AR5#ReferenceConfi#r$% for the primary cell when the -,is configured with the parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for the primary cell.
" The P-@@Dδ d> alues signalled on P+@@D with +@1 format '/F'>F'+F'F/FF>F@F+ or
,P+@@D with +@1 format '/F'>F'+F'F/FF>F@F+ are gien in Table 7.'..'"'. 1f the P+@@D with+@1 format 'F'/FF/F>F@F+ or ,P+@@D with +@1 format 'F'/F/FF>F@F+ is alidated as anSPS actiation P+@@DF,P+@@D! or the P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format '/ is alidated as an SPS
" The P-@@Dδ d> alues signalled on P+@@D with +@1 format 3F3/ are gien in Table 7.'..'"' or in
Table 7.'..'" as semi"statically configured by higher layers.
" 1f M-,P-@@D alue is changed by higher layers!
" ( )6 6 . =
" ,lse
" (6) rampup ms. . δ = ∆ + ! where
" ms. δ is the TP@ command indicated in the random access response corresponding to the
random access preamble transmitted in the primary cell! see subclause 9. and
" if -, is transmitting P-@@D in subframe i!
!
)K()(
)(!6ma%min
P
!!
P6
!
∆+∆+++−
=∆
3 3
nnnh L
T&D !CC- 3
*R -AR5C50 c
!CC-
cC)A7 rampup
∆ ested rampupre8u .
Mtherwise!
( )( ){ }[ ]ested rampupre8uc !CC- cC)A7 rampup L ∆+−=∆ !!6ma%min P 6!and
ested rampupre8u ∆ is proided by higher layers and corresponds to the total power ramp"upre0uested by higher layers from the first to the last preamble in the primary cell.
" 1f -, has reached )(c@2/A! i for the primary cell! positie TP@ commands for the primary cell shall
not be accumulated.
" 1f -, has reached minimum power! negatie TP@ commands shall not be accumulated.
" -, shall reset accumulation
" when M-,P-@@D alue is changed by higher layers
" when the -, receies a random access response message for the primary cell
" ( ) ( ') . i . i= − if i is not an uplink subframe in T++ or *++"T++ and primary cell frame structure
for the Sounding eference Symbol in the oerlapped portion would e%ceed )(L i C)A7 ! the -, scales )(L!SS i c
for the sering cell c and each of the oerlapped SS S@"*+2/ symbols in subframe i such that the condition
)(L)(L)( !S.S i i iw C)A7
c
c ≤⋅∑
is satisfied where )(L !SS i c is the linear alue of )(!SS i c ! )(L i C)A7 is the linear alue of C)A7 defined
in 94 in subframe i and )(iw is a scaling factor of )(L!SS i c for sering cell c where ')(6 ≤< iw . Bote that
)(iw alues are the same across sering cells.
1f the -, is configured with higher layer parameter !plin"owerControlDedicated#v$%&' for sering cell c and if
subframe i belongs to uplink power control subframe set as indicated by the higher layer parameter tpc#
*uframe*et#r$%, the -, shall use )(! i f c instead of )(i f c to determine )(!SS i c for subframe i and sering
cell c ! where )(! i f c is defined in subclause 7.'.'.'.
).1.4 *ower allocation for dual connectivity
1f a -, is configured with multiple cell groups!
" if the -, supports synchronous dual connectiity but does not support asynchronous dual connectiity! or if the-, supports both synchronous dual connectiity and asynchronous dual connectiity and if the higher layer parameter powerControl)ode indicates dual connectiity power control mode '
" if the ma%imum uplink timing difference between transmitted signals to different sering cells including
sering cells belonging to different @Gs is e0ual to or less than threshold dcT '
" The -, shall use the procedures described in sub clause 7.'.<.'.
" 1f a P/@D transmission of the -, on the Pcell starting in subframe 'i of 2@G oerlaps in time domain
with another P/@D transmission of the -, starting in subframe i of S@G! and if subframe 'i andsubframe i oerlap in time with more than one symbol! and if the total power of both the P/@D
transmissions would e%ceed )!'(L@2/A ii ! the -, shall transmit the P/@D on the Pcell using the
preamble transmission power P/@D described in subclause 9.'. The -, may drop or adjust the power of
the P/@D transmission in subframe i of S@G such that the total power does not e%ceed
)!'(L@2/A ii ! where )!'(L
@2/A ii is the linear alue configured transmitted power for +ual
@onnectiity for the subframe pair ( )!' ii as described in 94. 1f the -, drops the P/@D transmission!
it sends power ramping suspension indicator to the higher layers. 1f the -, adjusts the power of P/@Dtransmission! it may send power ramping suspension indicator to the higher layers.
" if the -, supports both synchronous dual connectiity and asynchronous dual connectiity and if the higherlayer parameter powerControl)ode does not indicate dual connectiity power control mode '
" The -, shall use the procedures described in sub clause 7.'.<. .
" 1f a P/@D transmission on the Pcell in subframe 'i of 2@G oerlaps in time another P/@D transmission
in subframe i of S@G! and if the time difference between the start of the two P/@D transmissions is less
than s36=6 T ⋅ ! and if the transmission timing of the P/@D on the Pcell (according to subclause 9.'.') is
such that the -, is ready to transmit the P/@D on Pcell at least one subframe before subframe 'i of 2@G!
and if the total power of both the P/@D transmissions e%ceeds )!'(L@2/A ii ! the -, shall transmit the
P/@D on the Pcell using the preamble transmission power PP/@D described in subclause 9.'. The -, may
drop or adjust the power of the P/@D transmission in subframe i
of S@G such that the total power does
not e%ceed )!'(L@2/A ii ! where )!'(L
@2/A ii is the linear alue configured transmitted power for +ual
@onnectiity for the subframe pair ( )!' ii as described in 94. 1f the -, drops the P/@D transmissions! it
sends power ramping suspension indicator to the higher layers. 1f the -, adjusts the power of P/@Dtransmission! it may send power ramping suspension indicator to the higher layers.
).1.4.1 (ual connectivity power control ode 1
1f the -, P-S@DFP-@@D transmission(s) in subframe 'i of @G' oerlap in time with P-S@DFP-@@D
transmission(s) in more than one symbol of subframe i of @G or if at least the last symbol the -, P-S@DFP-@@Dtransmission(s) in subframe 'i of @G' oerlap in time with SS transmission(s) of subframe i ! and
" if the -, has a P-@@DFP-S@D transmission with -@1 including D/E"/@CFS in subframe 'i of @G'# 1f
the -, has a P-@@D transmission with -@1 including D/E"/@CFS in subframe 'i of @G' and if
)'(L'
i C9 !CC- would e%ceed )'(' i* ! the -, scales )'(L
' i
C9 !CC- such that the condition
{ })'('!6ma%)'(L)'(''
i* i iC9 !CC- =⋅α is satisfied where ')'('6 ≤≤ iα and
)'(L)'(')'(KL' '
i ii C9 !CC- C9 !CC- ⋅= α . 1f )'(L
' i
C9 !CC- would not e%ceed )'(' i* !
)'(L)'(KL' ' i i C9 !CC- C9 !CC- = . 1f the -, has a P-S@D transmission with -@1 including D/E"/@C in
subframe 'i of sering cell '' C9c ∈ ! and if )'(L'! i c !*C- would e%ceed )'(' i* ! the -, scales )'(L
'! i c !*C-
such that the condition { })'('!6ma%)'(L)'(''!
i* i ic !*C- =⋅α is satisfied where ')'('6 ≤≤ iα and
)'(L)'(')'(KL'' !! i ii c !*C- c !*C- ⋅= α . 1f )'(L
'! i c !*C- would not e%ceed )'(' i* !
)'(L)'(KL'' !! i i c !*C- c !*C- = .
)'(' i* is determined as follows
−⋅−−−=
)(KL
!)(L
'66)!'(L
!6
ma%min)(L)'(L)!'(L)'('
'
'
@2/A''@2/A
i
i ii i i ii i*
C9
u
γ
where
" )'(L)'(L' ' i i C9 RAC- u =
" if @G' is 2@G and @G is S@G!
" )(L)(L '
i i C9 RAC- 8 =
" ∑∈
++=
!! '
)(
LQ)(L)(L)(KL
C9c
c*R* c !*C- C9 !CC- 8i i i i
" if @G' is S@G and @G is 2@G
" if the -, has a P-@@D transmission with -@1 including D/E"/@CFS subframe i of @G!
" )(KL)(L)(L '
i i i C9 !CC- C9 RAC- 8 +=
" ∑∈
+=
!!'
)(
LQ)(L)(KL
C9c
c*R* c !*C- 8i i i
" else if the -, has a P-S@D transmission with -@1 including D/E"/@C in subframe i of sering cell
on subframe i or subframe '+i for another sering cell(s) in @G'! the -, shall drop the SS transmissions in
@G' if the total transmission power of @G' e%ceeds'
'LC9 on any oerlapped portion of the symbol.
" if the -, is configured with multiple T/Gs within @G'! the -, shall! when re0uested by higher layers! to
transmit P/@D in a secondary sering cell in @G' in parallel with SS transmission in a symbol on a
subframe of a different sering cell belonging to a different T/G of @G'! drop SS in @G' if the totaltransmission power of @G' e%ceeds
'
'LC9 on any oerlapped portion in the symbol.
" if the -, is configured with multiple T/Gs within @G'! the -, shall! when re0uested by higher layers! totransmit P/@D in a secondary sering cell in @G' in parallel with P-S@DFP-@@D in a different sering cell belonging to a different T/G in @G'! adjust the transmission power of P-S@DFP-@@D in @G' so that its total
transmission power of @G' does not e%ceed'
'LC9 on the oerlapped portion.
Table 5.1.4.2-1: )C9γ (or *C9γ ) al$es for e%er*"!"!# ,oer alloa%"o! for $al o!!e%""%
,-+e(or ,-Se)
)C9γ (or *C9γ ) Val$e ("! )
- -
1 )
2 1-
3 1)
4 2-
) 3-
3/
/ 44
)-
)
1- 3
11 /-12 -
13 -
14 )
1) 1--
).2 (ownlin# power allocation
The eBode> determines the downlink transmit energy per resource element.
/ -, may assume downlink cell"specific S ,P, is constant across the downlink system bandwidth and constantacross all subframes until different cell"specific S power information is receied. The downlink cell"specific
reference"signal ,P, can be deried from the downlink reference"signal transmit power gien by the parameterreference*inalower proided by higher layers. The downlink reference"signal transmit power is defined as the linearaerage oer the power contributions (in 4) of all resource elements that carry cell"specific reference signals withinthe operating system bandwidth.
The ratio of P+S@D ,P, to cell"specific S ,P, among P+S@D ,s (not applicable to P+S@D ,s with &ero
,P,) for each M*+2 symbol is denoted by either A ρ or / ρ according to the M*+2 symbol inde% as gien by
Table 7." and Table 7."3. 1n addition! A ρ and / ρ are -,"specific.
*or a -, in transmission mode ? " '6 when -,"specific Ss are not present in the P>s upon which the correspondingP+S@D is mapped or in transmission modes ' ; =! the -, may assume that for '9 E/2! 9< E/2! or 79E/2! spatialmultiple%ing with more than one layer or for P+S@D transmissions associated with the multi"user 212M transmissionscheme!
" A ρ is e0ual to )(log'6 '6offset" power ++ A δ d>4 when the -, receies a P+S@D data transmission using
precoding for transmit diersity with < cell"specific antenna ports according to subclause 9.3.<.3 of 34
" A ρ is e0ual to A +offset" power δ d>4 otherwise
where offset" power δ is 6 d> for all P+S@D transmission schemes e%cept multi"user 212M and where A is a -,
specific parameter proided by higher layers.
*or a -, configured with higher layers parameter servCellp#a#r$%! and the -, in transmission modes ?"'6 when -,"
specific Ss are not present in the P>s upon which the corresponding P+S@D is mapped or in transmission modes '"=! the -, may assume that for EPSC and transmission with single"antenna port or transmit diersity transmissionschemes or spatial multiple%ing using a single transmission layer! and the P+S@D transmission is not associated withthe multi"user 212M transmission scheme! and the P+S@D is scheduled by a P+@@DF,P+@@D with @@ scrambled by @"BT1!
" A ρ is e0ual to ( )log'6'6⋅+′
A d>4 when the -, receies a P+S@D data transmission using precoding for
transmit diersity with < cell"specific antenna ports according to subclause 9.3.<.3 of 34
" A ρ is e0ual to A ′ d>4 otherwise
and where A ′ is gien by the parameter servCellp#a#r$%.
*or transmission mode =! if -,"specific Ss are present in the P>s upon which the corresponding P+S@D is mapped!the ratio of P+S@D ,P, to -,"specific S ,P, within each M*+2 symbol containing -,"specific Ss shall be aconstant! and that constant shall be maintained oer all the M*+2 symbols containing the -,"specific Ss in thecorresponding P>s. 1n addition! the -, may assume that for '9E/2! 9<E/2! or 79E/2! this ratio is 6 d>.
*or transmission mode ?! if -,"specific Ss are present in the P>s upon which the corresponding P+S@D is mapped!
the -, may assume the ratio of P+S@D ,P, to -,"specific S ,P, within each M*+2 symbol containing -,"specific Ss is 6 d>.
*or transmission mode 5 or '6! if -,"specific Ss are present in the P>s upon which the corresponding P+S@D ismapped! the -, may assume the ratio of P+S@D ,P, to -,"specific S ,P, within each M*+2 symbolcontaining -,"specific S is 6 d> for number of transmission layers less than or e0ual to two and "3 d> otherwise.
/ -, may assume that downlink positioning reference signal ,P, is constant across the positioning reference signal bandwidth and across all M*+2 symbols that contain positioning reference signals in a gien positioning referencesignal occasion '64.
1f @S1"S is configured in a sering cell then a -, shall assume downlink @S1"S ,P, is constant across thedownlink system bandwidth and constant across all subframes for each @S1"S resource.
The cell"specific ratio A / ρ ρ F is gien by Table 7."' according to cell"specific parameter / signalled by higher
layers and the number of configured eBode> cell specific antenna ports.
Table 5.2-1: Te ell-s,e"f" ra%"o A / ρ ρ F for 1 2 or 4 ell s,e"f" a!%e!!a ,or%s
/ A / ρ ρ F
;!e !%e!!a Por% To a! o$r !%e!!a Por%s
- 1 )'4
1 4') 1
2 3') 3'4
3 2') 1'2
*or P2@D with '9E/2! 9<E/2! or 79E/2! the -, may assume that the ratio of P2@D ,P, to 2>S*B S,P, is e0ual to 6 d>.
1f the -, is configured with a S@G! the -, shall apply the procedures described in this clause for both 2@G and S@G
" hen the procedures are applied for 2@G! the terms Nsecondary cellO! Nsecondary cellsO ! Nsering cellO! NseringcellsO in this clause refer to secondary cell! secondary cells! sering cell! sering cells belonging to the 2@Grespectiely.
" hen the procedures are applied for S@G! the terms Nsecondary cellO! Nsecondary cellsO! Nsering cellO! NseringcellsO in this clause refer to secondary cell! secondary cells (not including PS@ell)! sering cell! sering cells
belonging to the S@G respectiely. The term Nprimary cellO in this clause refers to the PS@ell of the S@G
Prior to initiation of the non"synchroni&ed physical random access procedure! :ayer ' shall receie the followinginformation from the higher layers#
" andom access channel parameters (P/@D configuration and fre0uency position)
" Parameters for determining the root se0uences and their cyclic shifts in the preamble se0uence set for the
primary cell (inde% to logical root se0uence table! cyclic shift ( @S N )! and set type (unrestricted or restrictedset))
.1 *hysical non%synchronized random access procedure
*rom the physical layer perspectie! the :' random access procedure encompasses the transmission of random access
preamble and random access response. The remaining messages are scheduled for transmission by the higher layer onthe shared data channel and are not considered part of the :' random access procedure. / random access channeloccupies 9 resource blocks in a subframe or set of consecutie subframes resered for random access preambletransmissions. The eBode> is not prohibited from scheduling data in the resource blocks resered for random accesschannel preamble transmission.
The following steps are re0uired for the :' random access procedure#
" :ayer ' procedure is triggered upon re0uest of a preamble transmission by higher layers.
" / preamble inde%! a target preamble receied power (P,/2>:,,@,1$,+T/G,TPM,)! a
corresponding /"BT1 and a P/@D resource are indicated by higher layers as part of the re0uest.
" / preamble transmission power PP/@D is determined as
PP/@D I min )(c@2/A! i ! P,/2>:,,@,1$,+T/G,TPM, J c L Ud>m4! where
)(c@2/A! i is the configured -, transmit power defined in 94 for subframe i of sering cell c and c L is
the downlink path loss estimate calculated in the -, for sering cell c .
" / preamble se0uence is selected from the preamble se0uence set using the preamble inde%.
" / single preamble is transmitted using the selected preamble se0uence with transmission power PP/@D on theindicated P/@D resource.
" +etection of a P+@@D with the indicated /"BT1 is attempted during a window controlled by higher layers(see ?4! subclause 7.'.<). 1f detected! the corresponding +:"S@D transport block is passed to higher layers. Thehigher layers parse the transport block and indicate the 6"bit uplink grant to the physical layer! which is processed according to subclause 9..
.1.1 !imin"
*or the :' random access procedure! -,Ks uplink transmission timing after a random access preamble transmission is asfollows.
a) 1f a P+@@D with associated /"BT1 is detected in subframe n! and the corresponding +:"S@D transport block contains a response to the transmitted preamble se0uence! the -, shall! according to the information in the
response! transmit an -:"S@D transport block in the first subframe '" n + ! 9' ≥" ! if the -: delay field in
subclause 9. is set to &ero where '" n + is the first aailable -: subframe for P-S@D transmission! where for
T++ sering cell! the first -: subframe for P-S@D transmission is determined based on the -:F+: configuration
(i.e.! the parameter suframeAssinment ) indicated by higher layers. The -, shall postpone the P-S@D
transmission to the ne%t aailable -: subframe after '" n + if the field is set to '.
b) 1f a random access response is receied in subframe n! and the corresponding +:"S@D transport block does not
contain a response to the transmitted preamble se0uence! the -, shall! if re0uested by higher layers! be ready totransmit a new preamble se0uence no later than in subframe 7n + .
c) 1f no random access response is receied in subframe n! where subframe n is the last subframe of the randomaccess response window! the -, shall! if re0uested by higher layers! be ready to transmit a new preamble
se0uence no later than in subframe <n + .
1n case a random access procedure is initiated by a 8P+@@D order8 in subframe n! the -, shall! if re0uested by higher
layers! transmit random access preamble in the first subframe n " + ! 9" ≥ ! where a P/@D resource is aailable.
1f a -, is configured with multiple T/Gs! and if the -, is configured with the carrier indicator field for a gien seringcell! the -, shall use the carrier indicator field alue from the detected 8P+@@D order8 to determine the sering cell for the corresponding random access preamble transmission.
.2 Random Access Response :rant
The higher layers indicate the 6"bit -: Grant to the physical layer! as defined in 3GPP TS 39.3' ?4.This is referred to the andom /ccess esponse Grant in the physical layer.The content of these 6 bits starting with the 2S> and ending with the :S> are as follows#
" Dopping flag ; ' bit
" *i%ed si&e resource block assignment ; '6 bits
" Truncated modulation and coding scheme ; < bits
" TP@ command for scheduled P-S@D ; 3 bits
" -: delay ; ' bit
" @S1 re0uest ; ' bit
The -, shall use the single"antenna port uplink transmission scheme for the P-S@D transmission corresponding to theandom /ccess esponse Grant and the P-S@D retransmission for the same transport block.
The -, shall perform P-S@D fre0uency hopping if the single bit fre0uency hopping (*D) field in a correspondingandom /ccess esponse Grant is set as ' and the uplink resource block assignment is type 6! otherwise no P-S@Dfre0uency hopping is performed. hen the hopping flag is set! the -, shall perform P-S@D hopping as indicated ia
the fi%ed si&e resource block assignment detailed below.
The fi%ed si&e resource block assignment field is interpreted as follows#
if <<-:> ≤ N
Truncate the fi%ed si&e resource block assignment to its least significant bits! where
( )( ) F'log -:
>-:> +⋅= N N + ! and interpret the truncated resource block assignment according to the rules for a
regular +@1 format 6
else
1nsert most significant bits with alue set to K6K after the N !L<hop hopping bits in the fi%ed si&e resource blockassignment! where the number of hopping bits N !L<hop is &ero when the hopping flag bit is not set to '! and is defined
in Table ?.<"' when the hopping flag bit is set to '! and ( )( )
−+⋅= '6F'log -:
>
-:
> N N +
! and interpret thee%panded resource block assignment according to the rules for a regular +@1 format 6
The truncated modulation and coding scheme field is interpreted such that the modulation and coding schemecorresponding to the andom /ccess esponse grant is determined from 2@S indices 6 through '7 in Table ?.9.'"'.
The TP@ command ms. δ shall be used for setting the power of the P-S@D! and is interpreted according to Table 9."
'.
Table 6.2-1: TP o**a! ms. δ for Se$le P&S<
TP o**a! Val$e ("! )- %
1 %4
2 %2
3 -4 2
) 4
/
1n non"contention based random access procedure! the @S1 re0uest field is interpreted to determine whether an aperiodic
@E1! P21! and 1 report is included in the corresponding P-S@D transmission according to subclause =..'. 1ncontention based random access procedure! the @S1 re0uest field is resered.
The -: delay applies for T++! *++ and *++"T++ and this field can be set to 6 or ' to indicate whether the delay of
P-S@D is introduced as shown in subclause 9.'.'.
/ *hysical downlin# shared channel related procedures
1f the -, is configured with a S@G! the -, shall apply the procedures described in this clause for both 2@G and S@Gunless stated otherwise
" hen the procedures are applied for 2@G! the terms Nsecondary cellO! Nsecondary cellsO! Nsering cellO! and
Nsering cellsO in this clause refer to secondary cell! secondary cells! sering cell or sering cells belonging to the2@G respectiely unless stated otherwise. The terms NsubframeO and NsubframesO refer to subframe or subframes belonging to 2@G.
" hen the procedures are applied for S@G! the terms Nsecondary cellO! Nsecondary cellsO! Nsering cellO and
Nsering cellsO in this clause refer to secondary cell! secondary cells (not including the PS@ell)! sering cell!sering cells belonging to the S@G respectiely unless stated otherwise. The term Nprimary cellO in this clauserefers to the PS@ell of the S@G. The terms NsubframeO and NsubframesO refer to subframe or subframes belongingto S@G.
*or *++! there shall be a ma%imum of ? downlink D/E processes per sering cell.
*or *++"T++ and primary cell frame structure type '! there shall be a ma%imum of ? downlink D/E processes persering cell.
*or T++ and a -, not configured with the parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for any sering cell!! if the -,
is configured with one sering cell! or if the -, is configured with more than one sering cell and the T++ -:F+:configuration of all the configured sering cells is the same! the ma%imum number of downlink D/E processes persering cell shall be determined by the -:F+: configuration (Table <." of 34)! as indicated in Table ="'.
*or T++! if a -, is configured with more than one sering cell and if the T++ -:F+: configuration of at least twoconfigured sering cells is not the same! or if the -, is configured with the parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$%
for at least one sering cell! or for *++"T++ and primary cell frame structure type and sering cell frame structuretype ! the ma%imum number of downlink D/E processes for a sering cell shall be determined as indicated in Table="'! wherein the 8T++ -:F+: configuration8 in Table ="' refers to the +:"reference -:F+: configuration for thesering cell (as defined in subclause '6.).
*or *++"T++ and primary cell frame structure type and sering cell frame structure type '! the ma%imum number ofdownlink D/E processes for the sering cell shall be determined by the +:"reference -:F+: configuration for thesering cell (as defined in subclause '6.)! as indicated in Table =".
The dedicated broadcast D/E process defined in ?4 is not counted as part of the ma%imum number of D/E processes for *++! T++ and *++"T++.
Table 7-1: +a>"*$* !$*ber of D' <R@ ,roesses for TDD
TDD &'D' o!f"#$ra%"o! +a>"*$* !$*ber of <R@ ,roesses
- 4
1 /
2 1-
3
4 12
) 1)
Table 7-2: +a>"*$* !$*ber of D' <R@ ,roesses for DD-TDD ,r"*ar ell fra*e s%r$%$re %,e2 a! ser"!# ell fra*e s%r$%$re %,e 1
D'-refere!e &'D'o!f"#$ra%"o!
+a>"*$* !$*ber of <R@ ,roesses
- 1-1 11
2 12
3 1)
4 1
) 1
12
/.1 +, procedure for receivin" the physical downlin# sharedchannel
,%cept the subframes indicated by the higher layer parameter msfn#*uframeConfiList or by msfn#
*uframeConfiList#v$%&' of sering cell c ! a -, shall
" upon detection of a P+@@D of the sering cell with +@1 format '! '/! '>! '@! '+! ! /! >! @! or +
intended for the -, in a subframe! or
" upon detection of an ,P+@@D of the sering cell with +@1 format '! '/! '>! '+! ! /! >! @! or + intendedfor the -, in a subframe
decode the corresponding P+S@D in the same subframe with the restriction of the number of transport blocks defined
in the higher layers.
1f a -, is configured with more than one sering cell and if the frame structure type of any two configured sering cellsis different! then the -, is considered to be configured for *++"T++ carrier aggregation.
,%cept for 2>2S reception! the -, is not re0uired to monitor P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the S1"BT1 on thePS@ell.
/ -, may assume that positioning reference signals are not present in resource blocks in which it shall decode P+S@Daccording to a detected P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the S1"BT1 or P"BT1 with +@1 format '/ or '@ intendedfor the -,.
/ -, configured with the carrier indicator field for a gien sering cell shall assume that the carrier indicator field isnot present in any P+@@D of the sering cell in the common search space that is described in subclause 5.'. Mtherwise!the configured -, shall assume that for the gien sering cell the carrier indicator field is present in P+@@DF,P+@@Dlocated in the -, specific search space described in subclause 5.' when the P+@@DF,P+@@D @@ is scrambled by @"
BT1 or SPS @"BT1.
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the S1"BT1! the -, shall decode theP+@@D and the corresponding P+S@D according to any of the combinations defined in Table =.'"'. The scramblinginitiali&ation of P+S@D corresponding to these P+@@Ds is by S1"BT1.
($ format 1 ommon $f the number of *8; antenna ports is one6 Sin"le%antenna port6 port - is used 0see
subclause /.1.16 otherwise !ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2.($ format 1A ommon $f the number of *8; antenna ports is one6 Sin"le%antenna port6 port - is used 0see
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the P"BT1! the -, shall decode theP+@@D and the corresponding P+S@D according to any of the combinations defined in Table =.'".The scrambling initiali&ation of P+S@D corresponding to these P+@@Ds is by P"BT1.
The -, is not re0uired to monitor P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the P"BT1 on the PS@ell.
Table 7.1-2: PD< a! PDS< o!f"#$re b P-RT/
D/ for*a% SearS,ae
Tra!s*"ss"o! se*e of PDS< orres,o!"!# %o PD<
($ format 1 ommon $f the number of *8; antenna ports is one6 Sin"le%antenna port6 port - is used 0seesubclause /.1.16 otherwise !ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
($ format 1A ommon $f the number of *8; antenna ports is one6 Sin"le%antenna port6 port - is used 0seesubclause /.1.16 otherwise !ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the /"BT1! the -, shall decodethe P+@@D and the corresponding P+S@D according to any of the combinations defined in Table =.'"3. Thescrambling initiali&ation of P+S@D corresponding to these P+@@Ds is by /"BT1.
hen /"BT1 and either @"BT1 or SPS @"BT1 are assigned in the same subframe! the -, is not re0uired to
decode a P+S@D on the primary cell indicated by a P+@@DF,P+@@D with a @@ scrambled by @"BT1 or SPS @"BT1.
Table 7.1-3: PD< a! PDS< o!f"#$re b R-RT/
D/ for*a% SearS,ae
Tra!s*"ss"o! se*e of PDS< orres,o!"!# %o PD<
($ format 1 ommon $f the number of *8; antenna ports is one6 Sin"le%antenna port6 port - is used 0seesubclause /.1.16 otherwise !ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
($ format 1A ommon $f the number of *8; antenna ports is one6 Sin"le%antenna port6 port - is used 0seesubclause /.1.16 otherwise !ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
The -, is semi"statically configured ia higher layer signalling to receie P+S@D data transmissions signalled iaP+@@DF,P+@@D according to one of the transmission modes! denoted mode ' to mode '6.
*or frame structure type '!
" the -, is not e%pected to receie P+S@D resource blocks transmitted on antenna port 7 in any subframe inwhich the number of M*+2 symbols for P+@@D with normal @P is e0ual to four
" the -, is not e%pected to receie P+S@D resource blocks transmitted on antenna port 7! =! ?! 5! '6! ''! '! '3 or '< in the two P>s to which a pair of $>s is mapped if either one of the two P>s oerlaps in fre0uency witha transmission of either P>@D or primary or secondary synchroni&ation signals in the same subframe
" the -, is not e%pected to receie P+S@D resource blocks transmitted on antenna port = for which distributed
" The -, may skip decoding the transport block(s) if it does not receie all assigned P+S@D resource blocks. 1fthe -, skips decoding! the physical layer indicates to higher layer that the transport block(s) are not successfullydecoded.
*or frame structure type !
" the -, is not e%pected to receie P+S@D resource blocks transmitted on antenna port 7 in any subframe inwhich the number of M*+2 symbols for P+@@D with normal @P is e0ual to four
" the -, is not e%pected to receie P+S@D resource blocks transmitted on antenna port 7 in the two P>s towhich a pair of $>s is mapped if either one of the two P>s oerlaps in fre0uency with a transmission ofP>@D in the same subframe
" the -, is not e%pected to receie P+S@D resource blocks transmitted on antenna port =! ?! 5! '6! ''! '! '3 or
'< in the two P>s to which a pair of $>s is mapped if either one of the two P>s oerlaps in fre0uency witha transmission of primary or secondary synchroni&ation signals in the same subframe
" with normal @P configuration! the -, is not e%pected to receie P+S@D on antenna port 7 for which distributed$> resource allocation is assigned in the special subframe with configuration V' or V9
" the -, is not e%pected to receie P+S@D on antenna port = for which distributed $> resource allocation isassigned
" with normal cyclic prefi%! the -, is not e%pected to receie P+S@D resource blocks transmitted on antenna port7 in +wPTS when the -, is configured with special subframe configuration 5.
" The -, may skip decoding the transport block(s) if it does not receie all assigned P+S@D resource blocks. 1fthe -, skips decoding! the physical layer indicates to higher layer that the transport block(s) are not successfullydecoded.
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the @"BT1! the -, shall decode the
P+@@D and any corresponding P+S@D according to the respectie combinations defined in Table =.'"7. Thescrambling initiali&ation of P+S@D corresponding to these P+@@Ds is by @"BT1.
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode ,P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the @"BT1! the -, shall decodethe ,P+@@D and any corresponding P+S@D according to the respectie combinations defined in Table =.'"7/. The
scrambling initiali&ation of P+S@D corresponding to these ,P+@@Ds is by @"BT1.
1f the -, is configured with the carrier indicator field for a gien sering cell and! if the -, is configured by higherlayers to decode P+@@DF,P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the @"BT1! then the -, shall decode P+S@D of thesering cell indicated by the carrier indicator field alue in the decoded P+@@DF,P+@@D.
hen a -, configured in transmission mode 3! <! ?! 5 or '6 receies a +@1 *ormat '/ assignment! it shall assume thatthe P+S@D transmission is associated with transport block ' and that transport block is disabled.
hen a -, is configured in transmission mode =! scrambling initiali&ation of -,"specific reference signalscorresponding to these P+@@DsF,P+@@Ds is by @"BT1.
The -, does not support transmission mode ? if e%tended cyclic prefi% is used in the downlink.
hen a -, is configured in transmission mode 5 or '6! in the downlink subframes indicated by the higher layer
parameter msfn#*uframeConfiList or by msfn#*uframeConfiList#v$%&' of sering cell c e%cept in subframes
for the sering cell
" indicated by higher layers to decode P2@D or!
" configured by higher layers to be part of a positioning reference signal occasion and the positioning referencesignal occasion is only configured within 2>S*B subframes and the cyclic prefi% length used in subframe V6 isnormal cyclic prefi%!
the -, shall upon detection of a P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the @"BT1 with +@1 format '/F@F+ intended forthe -, or! upon detection of an ,P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the @"BT1 with +@1 format '/F@F+ intended for the -,! decode the corresponding P+S@D in the same subframe.
/ -, configured in transmission mode '6 can be configured with scrambling identities! in+2S!1+ ! '!6=i by higher
layers for -,"specific reference signal generation as defined in subclause 9.'6.3.' of 34 to decode P+S@D accordingto a detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the @"BT1 with +@1 format + intended for the -,.
+p to layer transmission6 ports /%14 0see subclause /.1.)8 or sin"le%antenna port6 port / or 0see subclause /.1.1
+oe 10($ format 1A
+, specificby %R7!$
• 7on%8SF7 subframe> $f the number of *8; antenna ports is one6
Sin"le%antenna port6 port - is used 0see subclause /.1.16 otherwise!ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
• 8SF7 subframe> Sin"le%antenna port6 port / 0see subclause /.1.1
($ format 2(+, specificby %R7!$
+p to layer transmission6 ports /%14 0see subclause /.1.)8 or sin"le%antenna port6 port / or 0see subclause /.1.1
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the SPS @"BT1! the -, shalldecode the P+@@D on the primary cell and any corresponding P+S@D on the primary cell according to the respectiecombinations defined in Table =.'"9. The same P+S@D related configuration applies in the case that a P+S@D is
transmitted without a corresponding P+@@D. The scrambling initiali&ation of P+S@D corresponding to these P+@@Dsand P+S@D without a corresponding P+@@D is by SPS @"BT1.
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode ,P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the SPS @"BT1! the -, shalldecode the ,P+@@D on the primary cell and any corresponding P+S@D on the primary cell according to the respectiecombinations defined in Table =.'"9/. The same P+S@D related configuration applies in the case that a P+S@D is
transmitted without a corresponding ,P+@@D. The scrambling initiali&ation of P+S@D corresponding to these,P+@@Ds and P+S@D without a corresponding ,P+@@D is by SPS @"BT1.
hen a -, is configured in transmission mode =! scrambling initiali&ation of -,"specific reference signals for P+S@Dcorresponding to these P+@@DsF,P+@@Ds and for P+S@D without a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D is by SPS @"BT1.
hen a -, is configured in transmission mode 5 or '6! in the downlink subframes indicated by the higher layer parameter msfn#*uframeConfiList or by msfn#*uframeConfiList#v$%&' of sering cell c e%cept in subframes
" configured by higher layers to be part of a positioning reference signal occasion and the positioning reference
signal occasion is only configured within 2>S*B subframes and the cyclic prefi% length used in subframe V6 isnormal cyclic prefi%!
the -, shall upon detection of a P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the SPS @"BT1 with +@1 format '/F@F+! orupon detection of a ,P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the SPS @"BT1 with +@1 format '/F@F+! or for a configuredP+S@D without P+@@D intended for the -,! decode the corresponding P+S@D in the same subframe.
/ -, configured in transmission mode '6 can be configured with scrambling identities! in+2S!1+ ! '!6=i by higher
layers for -,"specific reference signal generation as defined in subclause 9.'6.3.' of 34 to decode P+S@D accordingto a detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the SPS @"BT1 with +@1 format + intended for the -,.
*or P+S@D without a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D! the -, shall use the alue of S@1+n and the scrambling
identity of( )S@1+
1+
nn (as defined in subclause 9.'6.3.' of 34) deried from the +@1 format + corresponding to the
associated SPS actiation for -,"specific reference signal generation.
Table 7.1-6: PD< a! PDS< o!f"#$re b SPS -RT/
Tra!s*"ss"o!*oe
D/ for*a% Sear S,aeTra!s*"ss"o! se*e of PDS< orres,o!"!# %o
PD<
+oe 1($ format 1A
ommon and+, specific by %R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port - 0see subclause /.1.1
($ format 1 +, specific by %R7!$ Sin"le%antenna port6 port - 0see subclause /.1.1
+oe 2($ format 1A
ommon and+, specific by %R7!$
!ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
($ format 1 +, specific by %R7!$ !ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
+oe 3($ format 1A
ommon and+, specific by %R7!$
!ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
($ format 2A +, specific by %R7!$ !ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
+oe 4($ format 1A
ommon and
+, specific by %R7!$ !ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
($ format 2 +, specific by %R7!$!ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
+oe 5 ($ format 1Aommon and+, specific by %R7!$
!ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
+oe 6 ($ format 1Aommon and+, specific by %R7!$
!ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
+oe 7($ format 1A
ommon and+, specific by %R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port ) 0see subclause /.1.1
($ format 1 +, specific by %R7!$ Sin"le%antenna port6 port ) 0see subclause /.1.1
+oe 8($ format 1A
ommon and+, specific by %R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port /0see subclause /.1.1
($ format 28 +, specific by %R7!$ Sin"le%antenna port6 port / or 0see subclause /.1.1
+oe 9($ format 1A
ommon and+, specific by %R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port / 0see subclause /.1.1
($ format 2 +, specific by %R7!$ Sin"le%antenna port6 port / or 6 0see subclause /.1.1
+oe 10($ format 1A
ommon and+, specific by %R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port / 0see subclause /.1.1
($ format 2( +, specific by %R7!$ Sin"le%antenna port6 port / or 6 0see subclause /.1.1
%R7!$ Sin"le%antenna port6 port - 0see subclause /.1.1
+oe 2($ format 1A
+, specific by%R7!$
!ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
($ format 1+, specific by%R7!$
!ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
+oe 3($ format 1A
+, specific by%R7!$
!ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
($ format 2A+, specific by%R7!$
!ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
+oe 4($ format 1A
+, specific by%R7!$
!ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
($ format 2+, specific by%R7!$
!ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
+oe 5 ($ format 1A+, specific by%R7!$
!ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
+oe 6 ($ format 1A+, specific by%R7!$ !ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
+oe 7($ format 1A
+, specific by%R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port ) 0see subclause /.1.1
($ format 1+, specific by%R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port ) 0see subclause /.1.1
+oe 8($ format 1A
+, specific by%R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port /0see subclause /.1.1
($ format 28+, specific by%R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port / or 0see subclause /.1.1
+oe 9($ format 1A
+, specific by%R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port / 0see subclause /.1.1
($ format 2+, specific by%R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port / or 6 0see subclause /.1.1
+oe 10($ format 1A
+, specific by%R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port / 0see subclause /.1.1
($ format 2( +, specific by%R7!$ Sin"le%antenna port6 port / or 6 0see subclause /.1.1
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the Temporary @"BT1 and is notconfigured to decode P+@@D with @@ scrambled by the @"BT1! the -, shall decode the P+@@D and thecorresponding P+S@D according to the combination defined in Table =.'"=. The scrambling initiali&ation of P+S@Dcorresponding to these P+@@Ds is by Temporary @"BT1.
($ format 1Aommon and+, specificby !emporary %R7!$
$f the number of *8; antenna port is one6 Sin"le%antenna port6 port - is used 0seesubclause /.1.16 otherwise !ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
($ format 1+, specificby !emporary %R7!$
$f the number of *8; antenna port is one6 Sin"le%antenna port6 port - is used 0seesubclause /.1.16 otherwise !ransmit diversity 0see subclause /.1.2
The transmission schemes of the P+S@D are described in the following sub"subclauses.
/.1.1 Sin"le%antenna port scheme
*or the single"antenna port transmission schemes (port 6! port 7! port = or port ?) of the P+S@D! the -, may assumethat an eB> transmission on the P+S@D would be performed according to subclause 9.3.<.' of 34.
1n case an antenna port U?!=∈ p is used! the -, cannot assume that the other antenna port in the set U?!= is not
associated with transmission of P+S@D to another -,.
*or the transmit diersity transmission scheme of the P+S@D! the -, may assume that an eB> transmission on theP+S@D would be performed according to subclause 9.3.<.3 of 34
/.1.3 <ar"e delay (( scheme
*or the large delay @++ transmission scheme of the P+S@D! the -, may assume that an eB> transmission on theP+S@D would be performed according to large delay @++ as defined in subclause 9.3.<.. of 34.
/.1.4 losed%loop spatial multiple=in" scheme
*or the closed"loop spatial multiple%ing transmission scheme of the P+S@D! the -, may assume that an eB>transmission on the P+S@D would be performed according to the applicable number of transmission layers as definedin subclause 9.3.<..' of 34.
/.1.) ulti%user $5 scheme
*or the multi"user 212M transmission scheme of the P+S@D! the -, may assume that an eB> transmission on the
P+S@D would be performed on one layer and according to subclause 9.3.<..' of 34. The offset" power
δ
d> aluesignalled on P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format '+ using the downlink power offset field is gien in Table =.'.7"'.
Table 7.1.5-1: +a,,"!# of o!l"!A ,oer offse% f"el "! D/ for*a% 1D %o %e offset" power δ al$e.
Do!l"!A ,oer offse%f"el
offset" power δ
- %1-lo"1-02
1 -
/.1.)A (ual layer scheme*or the dual layer transmission scheme of the P+S@D! the -, may assume that an eB> transmission on the P+S@D
would be performed with two transmission layers on antenna ports = and ? as defined in subclause 9.3.<.< of 34.
/.1.)8 +p to layer transmission scheme
*or the up to ? layer transmission scheme of the P+S@D! the -, may assume that an eB> transmission on the P+S@Dwould be performed with up to ? transmission layers on antenna ports = " '< as defined in subclause 9.3.<.< of 34.
/.1. Resource allocation
The -, shall interpret the resource allocation field depending on the P+@@DF,P+@@D +@1 format detected. /resource allocation field in each P+@@DF,P+@@D includes two parts! a resource allocation header field andinformation consisting of the actual resource block assignment.
P+@@D +@1 formats '! ! /! >! @ and + with type 6 and P+@@D +@1 formats '! ! /! >! @ and + with type' resource allocation hae the same format and are distinguished from each other ia the single bit resource allocationheader field which e%ists depending on the downlink system bandwidth (subclause 7.3.3.' of <4)! where type 6 isindicated by 6 alue and type ' is indicated otherwise. P+@@D with +@1 format '/! '>! '@ and '+ hae a type resource allocation while P+@@D with +@1 format '! ! /! >! @ and + hae type 6 or type ' resource allocation.
P+@@D +@1 formats with a type resource allocation do not hae a resource allocation header field.
,P+@@D +@1 formats '! ! /! >! @ and + with type 6 and ,P+@@D +@1 formats '! ! /! >! @ and + withtype ' resource allocation hae the same format and are distinguished from each other ia the single bit resourceallocation header field which e%ists depending on the downlink system bandwidth (subclause 7.3.3.' of <4)! where type
6 is indicated by 6 alue and type ' is indicated otherwise. ,P+@@D with +@1 format '/! '>! and '+ hae a type
resource allocation while ,P+@@D with +@1 format '! ! /! >! @ and + hae type 6 or type ' resource allocation.,P+@@D +@1 formats with a type resource allocation do not hae a resource allocation header field.
/ -, may assume! for any P+S@D transmission scheduled by a cell with physical cell identity gien in NA0C*#
Assistance0nfo#r$% and the P+S@D transmission mode belonging to transmission)odeList#r$% associated with the celle%cept spatial multiple%ing using up to ? transmission layers in transmission mode '6! that the resource allocationgranularity and precoding granularity in terms of P> pairs in the fre0uency domain are both gien by N ! where N is
gien by the higher layer parameter resAlloc9ranularit=#r$% associated with the cell. The first set of N consecutieP> pairs of the resource allocation starts from the lowest fre0uency of the system bandwidth and the -, may assume
the same precoding applies to all P> pairs within a set.
/.1..1 Resource allocation type -
1n resource allocations of type 6! resource block assignment information includes a bitmap indicating the esource>lock Groups (>Gs) that are allocated to the scheduled -, where a >G is a set of consecutie irtual resource
blocks ($>s) of locali&ed type as defined in subclause 9..3.' of 34. esource block group si&e ( ) is a function of
the system bandwidth as shown in Table =.'.9.'"'. The total number of >Gs ( >G N ) for downlink system
bandwidth of +:> N is gien by N N R/9 F+:>= where N F+:
> of the >Gs are of si&e P and if
6mod+:
> > N then one of the >Gs is of si&e N N F+:>
+:> ⋅− . The bitmap is of si&e >G N bits with one
bitmap bit per >G such that each >G is addressable. The >Gs shall be inde%ed in the order of increasing fre0uency
and non"increasing >G si&es starting at the lowest fre0uency. The order of >G to bitmap bit mapping is in such way
that >G 6 to >G '>G − N are mapped to 2S> to :S> of the bitmap. The >G is allocated to the -, if the
corresponding bit alue in the bitmap is '! the >G is not allocated to the -, otherwise.
1n resource allocations of type '! a resource block assignment information of si&e >G N indicates to a scheduled -,
the $>s from the set of $>s from one of >G subsets. The irtual resource blocks used are of locali&ed type asdefined in subclause 9..3.' of 34. /lso is the >G si&e associated with the system bandwidth as shown in Table
=.'.9.'"'. / >G subset p ! where p <≤6 ! consists of eery th >G starting from >G p . The resource
block assignment information consists of three fields <4.
The first field with )(log bits is used to indicate the selected >G subset among >G subsets.
The second field with one bit is used to indicate a shift of the resource allocation span within a subset. / bit alue of 'indicates shift is triggered. Shift is not triggered otherwise.
The third field includes a bitmap! where each bit of the bitmap addresses a single $> in the selected >G subset insuch a way that 2S> to :S> of the bitmap are mapped to the $>s in the increasing fre0uency order. The $> isallocated to the -, if the corresponding bit alue in the bit field is '! the $> is not allocated to the -, otherwise. The
portion of the bitmap used to address $>s in a selected >G subset has si&e TWP,'> N and is defined as
')(logF +:>
TWP,'> −−= N N
The addressable $> numbers of a selected >G subset start from an offset! )(shift p∆ to the smallest $> number
within the selected >G subset! which is mapped to the 2S> of the bitmap. The offset is in terms of the number of
$>s and is done within the selected >G subset. 1f the alue of the bit in the second field for shift of the resourceallocation span is set to 6! the offset for >G subset p is gien by 6)(shift =∆ p . Mtherwise! the offset for >G
subset p is gien byTWP,'
>
subset>G
>shift )()( N p N p −=∆ ! where the :S> of the bitmap is justified with the
highest $> number within the selected >G subset. )(subset>G
> p N is the number of $>s in >G subset p and
can be calculated by the following e0uation!
+: +:> >
+: +:>G subset +:> >> >
+: +:> >
' '! mod
' '( ) ( ') mod ' ! mod
' '! mod
N N p
N N N p N p
N N p
− −× + <
− −= × + − + =
− − × >
@onse0uently! when >G subset p is indicated! bit i forTWP,'>6!'! ! 'i N = −L in the bitmap field indicates $>
number!
( )>G subset shift$> shift
( )( ) ( ) mod
i pn p p i p
+ ∆ = + × + + ∆
.
/.1..3 Resource allocation type 2
1n resource allocations of type ! the resource block assignment information indicates to a scheduled -, a set ofcontiguously allocated locali&ed irtual resource blocks or distributed irtual resource blocks. 1n case of resourceallocation signalled with P+@@D +@1 format '/! '> or '+! or for resource allocation signalled with ,P+@@D +@1format '/! '>! or '+! one bit flag indicates whether locali&ed irtual resource blocks or distributed irtual resource
blocks are assigned (alue 6 indicates :ocali&ed and alue ' indicates +istributed $> assignment) while distributedirtual resource blocks are always assigned in case of resource allocation signalled with P+@@D +@1 format '@.:ocali&ed $> allocations for a -, ary from a single $> up to a ma%imum number of $>s spanning the system
bandwidth. *or +@1 format '/ the distributed $> allocations for a -, ary from a single $> up to +:
$> N $>s!
where +:$> N is defined in 34! if the +@1 @@ is scrambled by P"BT1! /"BT1! or S1"BT1. ith P+@@D +@1
format '>! '+ with a @@ scrambled by @"BT1! or with +@1 format '/ with a @@ scrambled with @"BT1! SPS @"
BT1 or Temporary @"BT1 distributed $> allocations for a -, ary from a single $> up to +:
$> N $>s if
+:
> N is 9"<5 and ary from a single $> up to '9 if+:
> N is 76"''6. ith ,P+@@D +@1 format '>! '+ with a
@@ scrambled by @"BT1! or with +@1 format '/ with a @@ scrambled with @"BT1! SPS @"BT1 distributed
$> allocations for a -, ary from a single $> up to +:
$> N $>s if+:
> N is 9"<5 and ary from a single $>
up to '9 if+:
> N is 76"''6. ith P+@@D +@1 format '@! distributed $> allocations for a -, ary fromstep
> N
$>(s) up to step
>
step
>
+:
$> F N N N ⋅ $>s with an increment step ofstep
> N ! wherestep
> N alue is determined
depending on the downlink system bandwidth as shown in Table =.'.9.3"'.
Table 7.1.6.3-1:step
> N al$es s. Do!l"!A Ss%e* a!"%
Ss%e* C (+:
> N )
step
> N
D/ for*a% 1
%4 2
)-%11- 4
*or P+@@D +@1 format '/! '> or '+! or for ,P+@@D +@1 format '/! '>! or '+! a type resource allocation field
consists of a resource indication alue ( R0> ) corresponding to a starting resource block ( start R/ ) and a length in terms
of irtually contiguously allocated resource blocks CR/s L . The resource indication alue is defined by
*or P+@@D +@1 format '@! a type resource block assignment field consists of a resource indication alue ( R0> )
corresponding to a starting resource block ( start R/ I6 !step
> N !step
> N !X!step
>
step
>
+:
$> )'F( N N N − ) and a
length in terms of irtually contiguously allocated resource blocks ( CR/s L I step
> N !step
> N !X!
step
>
step
>
+:
$> F N N N ⋅ ).
The resource indication alue is defined by#
if F)'( DL
>R/CR/s N L ′≤−′ then
startCR/s
DL
>R/ / R L N R0> ′+−′′= )'(else
)'()'( start
DL
>R/CR/s
DL
>R/
DL
>R/ / R N L N N R0> ′−−′++′−′′=where
step
R/CR/sCR/s N L L F=′ ! step
R/ start start N R/ / R F=′ and step
R/
DL
>R/
DL
>R/ N N N F=′ . Dere!
CR/s L′ ≥ ' and shall not e%ceed start
DL
>R/ / R N ′−′ .
/.1..4 *(S; startin" position
The starting M*+2 symbol for the P+S@D of each actiated sering cell is gien by inde%+ataStart
l in the first slot in
a subframe.
*or a -, configured in transmission mode '"5! for a gien actiated sering cell
" if the P+S@D is assigned by ,P+@@D receied in the same sering cell! or if the -, is configured to monitor,P+@@D in the subframe and the P+S@D is not assigned by a P+@@DF,P+@@D! and if the -, is configuredwith the higher layer parameter epdcch#*tart*=mol#r$$
" +ataStartl
is gien by the higher"layer parameter epdcch#*tart*=mol#r$$.
" else if P+S@D and the corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D are receied on different sering cells
" +ataStart
l
is gien by the higher"layer parameter pdsch#*tart#r$' for the sering cell on which P+S@D isreceied!
is gien by the @*1 alue in the subframe of the gien sering cell when '6+:> > N ! and +ataStartl
is gien by the @*1 alue J ' in the subframe of the gien sering cell when '6+:> ≤ N .
*or a -, configured in transmission mode '6! for a gien actiated sering cell
" if the P+S@D is assigned by a P+@@D with +@1 format '@ or by a P+@@D with +@1 format '/ and with @@scrambled with P"BT1F/"BT1FS1"BT1FTemporary @"BT1
" +ataStartl is gien by the span of the +@1 gien by the @*1 alue in the subframe of the gien sering cell
according to subclause 7.3.< of <4.
" if the P+S@D is assigned by a P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format '/ and with @@ scrambled with @"BT1and if the P+S@D transmission is on antenna ports 6 " 3
" if the P+S@D is assigned by ,P+@@D receied in the same sering cell
" +ataStartl
is gien by t,P+@@DStar l for the ,P+@@D"P>"set where ,P+@@D with the +@1 format '/
was receied ( t,P+@@DStar l as defined in subclause 5.'.<.')!
" else if P+S@D and the corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D are receied on different sering cells
" +ataStartl
is gien by the higher"layer parameter pdsch#*tart#r$' for the sering cell on which P+S@D isreceied.
" otherwise
" +ataStartl
is gien by the @*1 alue in the subframe of the gien sering cell when '6+:> > N ! and
+ataStartl
is gien by the @*1 alueJ' in the subframe of the gien sering cell when '6+:> ≤ N .
" if the P+S@D is assigned by or semi"statically scheduled by a P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format '/ and if the
P+S@D transmission is on antenna port =
" if the alue of the higher layer parameter pdsch#*tart#r$$ determined from parameter set ' in table =.'.5"' for
the sering cell on which P+S@D is receied belongs to '!!3!<U!
"K
+ataStartl is gien by the higher layer parameter pdsch#*tart#r$$ determined from parameter set ' in table
=.'.5"' for the sering cell on which P+S@D is receied.
" else!
" if P+S@D and the corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D are receied on different sering cells!
"
K
+ataStartl is gien by the higher"layer parameter pdsch#*tart#r$' for the sering cell on which
P+S@D is receied
" otherwise
"K
+ataStartl is gien by the @*1 alue in the subframe of the gien sering cell when '6+:
> > N ! and
+ataStartl
is gien by the @*1 alue J ' in the subframe of the gien sering cell when '6+:> ≤ N .
" if the subframe on which P+S@D is receied is indicated by the higher layer parameter msfn#
*uframeConfiList#r$$ determined from parameter set ' in table =.'.5"' for the sering cell on whichP+S@D is receied! or if the P+S@D is receied on subframe ' or 9 for the frame structure type !
" if the P+S@D is assigned by or semi"persistently scheduled by a P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format +!
" if the alue of the higher layer parameter pdsch#*tart#r$$ determined from the DCI (according to subclause
=.'.5) for the sering cell on which P+S@D is receied belongs to '!!3!<U,
" K
+ataStartl is gien by parameter pdsch#*tart#r$$ determined from the DCI (according to subclause =.'.5)
for the sering cell on which P+S@D is receied
" else,
" if P+S@D and the corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D are receied on different sering cells!
" K
+ataStartl is gien by the higher"layer parameter pdsch#*tart#r$' for the sering cell on which
P+S@D is receied
" Mtherwise
" K+ataStartl is gien by the @*1 alue in the subframe of the gien sering cell when '6+:
> > N ! and
+ataStartl
is gien by the @*1 alueJ' in the subframe of the gien sering cell when '6+:> ≤ N .
" if the subframe on which P+S@D is receied is indicated by the higher layer parameter msfn#
*uframeConfiList#r$$ determined from the +@1 (according to subclause =.'.5) for the sering cell on
which P+S@D is receied! or if the P+S@D is receied on subframe ' or 9 for frame structure type !
")!min( K
+ataStart+ataStartl l =
!
" otherwise
"
K
+ataStart+ataStart l l = .
/.1..) *hysical Resource 8loc# 0*R8 bundlin"
/ -, configured for transmission mode 5 for a gien sering cell c may assume that precoding granularity is multipleresource blocks in the fre0uency domain when P21F1 reporting is configured.
*or a gien sering cell c! if a -, is configured for transmission mode '6
" if P21F1 reporting is configured for all configured @S1 processes for the sering cell c! the -, may assume that precoding granularity is multiple resource blocks in the fre0uency domain!
" otherwise! the -, shall assume the precoding granularity is one resource block in the fre0uency domain.
*i%ed system bandwidth dependent Precoding esource block Groups (PGs) of si&e ′ partition the system
bandwidth and each PG consists of consecutie P>s. 1f 6mod+:> >′ N then one of the PGs is of si&e
N N ′′− F+:>
+:> . The PG si&e is non"increasing starting at the lowest fre0uency. The -, may assume that the
same precoder applies on all scheduled P>s within a PG.
The PG si&e a -, may assume for a gien system bandwidth is gien by#
/.1./ odulation order and transport bloc# size determination
To determine the modulation order and transport block si&e(s) in the physical downlink shared channel! the -, shallfirst
" read the 7"bit 8modulation and coding scheme8 field ( 2@S 0 ) in the +@1
and second if the +@1 @@ is scrambled by P"BT1! /"BT1! or S1"BT1 then
" for +@1 format '/#
" set the Table =.'.=..'"' column indicator P> N to '/P> N from subclause 7.3.3.'.3 in <4
" for +@1 format '@#
" use Table =.'.=..3"' for determining its transport block si&e.
else
" setP> N ′ to the total number of allocated P>s based on the procedure defined in subclause =.'.9.
if the transport block is transmitted in +wPTS of the special subframe in frame structure type ! then
" for special subframe configuration 5 with normal cyclic prefi% or special subframe configuration = withe%tended cyclic prefi%#
" set the Table =.'.=..'"' column indicator{ }P>ma% 6.3=7 ! ' R/ N N ′ = ×
" for other special subframe configurations#
" set the Table =.'.=..'"' column indicator { }P>ma% 6.=7 ! ' R/ N N ′ = × !
else! set the Table =.'.=..'"' column indicator R/ R/ N N ′= .
The -, may skip decoding a transport block in an initial transmission if the effectie channel code rate is higher than6.53'! where the effectie channel code rate is defined as the number of downlink information bits (including @@ bits)diided by the number of physical channel bits on P+S@D. 1f the -, skips decoding! the physical layer indicates to
higher layer that the transport block is not successfully decoded. *or the special subframe configurations 6 and 7 withnormal downlink @P or configurations 6 and < with e%tended downlink @P! shown in Table <."' of 34! there shall beno P+S@D transmission in +wPTS of the special subframe.
/.1./.1 odulation order determination
The -, shall use m5 = if the +@1 @@ is scrambled by P"BT1! /"BT1! or S1"BT1! otherwise!
" if the higher layer parameter altC50#Tale#r$% is configured! and if the P+S@D is assigned by aP+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 'F'>F'+FF/F>F@F+ with @@ scrambled by @"BT1!
" the -, shall use 2@S 0 and Table =.'.=.'"'/ to determine the modulation order ( m5 ) used in the physical
downlink shared channel.
" else
" the -, shall use 2@S 0 and Table =.'.=.'"' to determine the modulation order ( m5 ) used in the physical
" for =6 2@S ≤≤ 0 ! the -, shall first determine the T>S inde% ( T>S 0 ) using 2@S 0 and Table =.'.=.'"'/
e%cept if the transport block is disabled in +@1 formats ! /! >! @ and + as specified below. *or atransport block that is not mapped to more than single"layer spatial multiple%ing! the T>S is determined by
the procedure in subclause =.'.=..'. *or a transport block that is mapped to two"layer spatial multiple%ing!the T>S is determined by the procedure in subclause =.'.=... *or a transport block that is mapped to three"layer spatial multiple%ing! the T>S is determined by the procedure in subclause =.'.=..<. *or a transport
block that is mapped to four"layer spatial multiple%ing! the T>S is determined by the procedure in subclause=.'.=..7.
" for 3'? 2@S ≤≤ 0 ! the T>S is assumed to be as determined from +@1 transported in the latest
P+@@DF,P+@@D for the same transport block using 336 T>S ≤≤ 0 .
" 1n +@1 formats ! /! >! @ and + a transport block is disabled if 62@S = 0 and if rvid& I ' otherwise the
transport block is enabled.
else
" for ?6 2@S ≤≤ 0 ! the -, shall first determine the T>S inde% ( T>S 0 ) using 2@S 0 and Table =.'.=.'"' e%cept
if the transport block is disabled in +@1 formats ! /! >! @ and + as specified below. *or a transport blockthat is not mapped to more than single"layer spatial multiple%ing! the T>S is determined by the procedure in
subclause =.'.=..'. *or a transport block that is mapped to two"layer spatial multiple%ing! the T>S isdetermined by the procedure in subclause =.'.=... *or a transport block that is mapped to three"layer spatialmultiple%ing! the T>S is determined by the procedure in subclause =.'.=..<. *or a transport block that ismapped to four"layer spatial multiple%ing! the T>S is determined by the procedure in subclause =.'.=..7.
" for 3'5 2@S ≤≤ 0 ! the T>S is assumed to be as determined from +@1 transported in the latest
P+@@DF,P+@@D for the same transport block using ?6 2@S ≤≤ 0 . 1f there is no P+@@DF,P+@@D for the
same transport block using ?6 2@S ≤≤ 0 ! and if the initial P+S@D for the same transport block is semi"
persistently scheduled! the T>S shall be determined from the most recent semi"persistent scheduling assignmentP+@@DF,P+@@D.
" 1n +@1 formats ! /! >! @ and + a transport block is disabled if 62@S = 0 and if rvid& I ' otherwise the
transport block is enabled.
The B+1 and D/E process 1+! as signalled on P+@@DF,P+@@D! and the T>S! as determined aboe! shall bedeliered to higher layers.
/.1./.2.1 !ransport bloc#s not mapped to two or more layer spatial multiple=in"
*or ''6' P> ≤≤ N ! the T>S is gien by the ( T>S 0 ! P> N ) entry of Table =.'.=..'"'.
" the -, shall set the edundancy $ersion as defined in ?4.
/.1. Storin" soft channel bits
*or *++! T++ and *++"T++! if the -, is configured with more than one sering cell or if the -, is configured with
a S@G! then for each sering cell! for at least limit+:D/E212M !min ) ) 2 ⋅ transport blocks! upon decoding
failure of a code block of a transport block! the -, shall store receied soft channel bits corresponding to a range of at
least " w'+"
w !X! )!'mod( c+*/ N n" w −+ ! where#
( )
⋅⋅⋅
′=
limit+:D/E212M !min!min
) ) 2 N C
N N n
DL
cells
soft
c+*/ !
" w ! C ! c+ N ! 212M 2 ! !and limit ) are defined in subclause 7.'.<.'. of <4.
) +:D/E is the ma%imum number of +: D/E processes.
1f the -, is configured with a S@G
" DLcells N is the number of configured sering cells across both 2@G and S@G.
else
" DLcells N is the number of configured sering cells.
1f the -, signals ue#Cateor=DL#r$%! soft N ′ is the total number of soft channel bits '4 according to the -, category
indicated by ue#Cateor=DL#r$% ''4. ,lse if the -, signals ue#Cateor=#v$$' and not ue#Cateor=DL#r$%! soft N ′ is
the total number of soft channel bits '4 according to the -, category indicated by ue#Cateor=#v$$' ''4. ,lse if the
-, signals ue#Cateor=#v$'%' and not ue#Cateor=#v$$' and not ue#Cateor=DL#r$%! soft N ′ is the total number of
soft channel bits '4 according to the -, category indicated by ue#Cateor=#v$'%' ''4. Mtherwise! soft N ′
is the totalnumber of soft channel bits '4 according to the -, category indicated by ue#Cateor= (without suffi%) ''4.
1n determining " ! the -, should gie priority to storing soft channel bits corresponding to lower alues of " . " w shall
correspond to a receied soft channel bit. The range " w '+" w !X! )!'mod( c+*/ N n" w −+ may include subsets not
containing receied soft channel bits.
/.1. *(S; resource mappin" parameters
/ -, configured in transmission mode '6 for a gien sering cell can be configured with up to < parameter sets byhigher layer signaling to decode P+S@D according to a detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format + intended forthe -, and the gien sering cell. The -, shall use the parameter set according to the alue of the KP+S@D ,2apping and Euasi"@o":ocation indicatorK field (mapping defined in Table =.'.5"') in the detected P+@@DF,P+@@Dwith +@1 format + for determining the P+S@D , mapping (defined in subclause 9.< of 34)! and for determining
P+S@D antenna port 0uasi co"location (defined in subclause =.'.'6) if the -, is configured with Type > 0uasi co"location type (defined in subclause =.'.'6). *or P+S@D without a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D! the -, shall usethe parameter set indicated in the P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format + corresponding to the associated SPSactiation for determining the P+S@D , mapping (defined in subclause 9.< of 34) and P+S@D antenna port 0uasi co"location (defined in subclause =.'.'6).
The following parameters for determining P+S@D , mapping and P+S@D antenna port 0uasi co"location areconfigured ia higher layer signaling for each parameter set#
# crs#ortsCount#r$$.
# crs#3re*hift#r$$.
# msfn#*uframeConfiList#r$$.
# csi#R*#Confi?0d#r$$.
# pdsch#*tart#r$$.
# cl#C*0#R*#ConfiN?0d#r$$.
To decode P+S@D according to a detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format '/ with @@ scrambled with @"BT1
intended for the -, and the gien sering cell and for P+S@D transmission on antenna port =! a -, configured intransmission mode '6 for a gien sering cell shall use the parameter set ' in table =.'.5"' for determining the P+S@D, mapping (defined in subclause 9.< of 34)! and for determining P+S@D antenna port 0uasi co"location (defined insubclause =.'.'6) if the -, is configured with Type > 0uasi co"location type (defined in subclause =.'.'6).
To decode P+S@D corresponding to detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format '/ with @@ scrambled with SPS @"BT1 and P+S@D without a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D associated with SPS actiation indicated inP+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format '/! a -, configured in transmission mode '6 for a gien sering cell shall use the parameter set ' in table =.'.5"' for determining the P+S@D , mapping (defined in subclause 9.< of 34)! and fordetermining P+S@D antenna port 0uasi co"location (defined in subclause =.'.'6) if the -, is configured with Type >0uasi co"location type (defined in subclause =.'.'6).
To decode P+S@D according to a detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format '/ intended for the -, on a giensering cell and for P+S@D transmission on antenna port 6 ; 3! a -, configured in transmission mode '6 for the giensering cell shall determine the P+S@D , mapping (as described in subclause 9.< of 34) using the lowest inde%ed&ero"power @S1"S resource.
/.1.1- Antenna ports Cuasi co%location for *(S;
/ -, configured in transmission mode ?"'6 for a sering cell may assume the antenna ports = ; '< of the sering cellare 0uasi co"located (as defined in 34) for a gien subframe with respect to delay spread! +oppler spread! +oppler shift!aerage gain! and aerage delay.
/ -, configured in transmission mode '"5 for a sering cell may assume the antenna ports 6 ; 3! 7! = ; of thesering cell are 0uasi co"located (as defined in 34) with respect to +oppler shift! +oppler spread! aerage delay! anddelay spread.
/ -, configured in transmission mode '6 for a sering cell is configured with one of two 0uasi co"location types forthe sering cell by higher layer parameter cl#4peration to decode P+S@D according to transmission scheme
associated with antenna ports ="'<#
" Type /# The -, may assume the antenna ports 6 ; 3! = ; of a sering cell are 0uasi co"located (as defined in34) with respect to delay spread! +oppler spread! +oppler shift! and aerage delay.
" Type ># The -, may assume the antenna ports '7 ; corresponding to the @S1"S resource configurationidentified by the higher layer parameter cl#C*0#R*#ConfiN?0d#r$$ (defined in subclause =.'.5) and theantenna ports = ; '< associated with the P+S@D are 0uasi co"located (as defined in 34) with respect to +opplershift! +oppler spread! aerage delay! and delay spread.
/.2 +, procedure for reportin" hannel State $nformation 0S$
The time and fre0uency resources that can be used by the -, to report @S1 which consists of @hannel Euality 1ndicator(@E1)! precoding matri% indicator (P21)! precoding type indicator (PT1)! andFor rank indication (1) are controlled bythe eB>. *or spatial multiple%ing! as gien in 34! the -, shall determine a 1 corresponding to the number of useful
transmission layers. *or transmit diersity as gien in 34! 1 is e0ual to one.
/ -, in transmission mode ? or 5 is configured with or without P21F1 reporting by the higher layer parameter pmi#
R0#Report .
/ -, in transmission mode '6 can be configured with one or more @S1 processes per sering cell by higher layers.,ach @S1 process is associated with a @S1"S resource (defined in subclause =..7) and a @S1"interference
measurement (@S1"12) resource (defined in subclause =..9). / -, can be configured with up to two @S1"12 resources
for a @S1 process if the -, is configured with @S1 subframe sets @S1!6C and @S1!'C by the higher layer parameter
csi#*u3rameatternConfi#r$% for the @S1 process. / @S1 reported by the -, corresponds to a @S1 processconfigured by higher layers. ,ach @S1 process can be configured with or without P21F1 reporting by higher layersignalling.
/ -, is configured with resource"restricted @S1 measurements if the subframe sets @S1!6C and @S1!'C areconfigured by higher layers.
*or a sering cell with frame structure type '! a -, is not e%pected to be configured with csi#*uframeatternConfi#
r$%.
@S1 reporting is periodic or aperiodic.
1f the -, is configured with more than one sering cell! it transmits @S1 for actiated sering cell(s) only.
1f a -, is not configured for simultaneous P-S@D and P-@@D transmission! it shall transmit periodic @S1 reporting onP-@@D as defined hereafter in subframes with no P-S@D allocation.
1f a -, is not configured for simultaneous P-S@D and P-@@D transmission! it shall transmit periodic @S1 reporting on
P-S@D of the sering cell with smallest *ervCell0nde& as defined hereafter in subframes with a P-S@D allocation!where the -, shall use the same P-@@D"based periodic @S1 reporting format on P-S@D.
/ -, shall transmit aperiodic @S1 reporting on P-S@D if the conditions specified hereafter are met. *or aperiodic
@E1FP21 reporting! 1 reporting is transmitted only if the configured @S1 feedback type supports 1 reporting.
Table 7.2-1: Vo"
1n case both periodic and aperiodic @S1 reporting would occur in the same subframe! the -, shall only transmit theaperiodic @S1 report in that subframe.
1f the higher layer parameter altC50#Tale#r$% is configured and is set to all*uframes#r$%!
" the -, shall report @E1 according to Table =..3".
,lse if the higher layer parameter altC50#Tale#r$% is configured and is set to csi#*uframe*et$#r$% or csi#
*uframe*et%#r$%,
" the -, shall report @E1 according to Table =..3" for the corresponding @S1 subframe set configured byaltC50#Tale#r$%
" the -, shall report @E1 for the other @S1 subframe set according to Table =..3"'.
,lse
" the -, shall report @E1 according to Table =..3"'.
hen reporting 1 the -, reports a single instance of the number of useful transmission layers. *or each 1 reportinginteral when the -, is configured in transmission modes < or when the -, is configured in transmission mode ?! 5 or
'6 with P21F1 reporting! a -, shall determine a 1 from the supported set of 1 alues as defined in subclause 7...9
of <4 and report the number in each 1 report. *or each 1 reporting interal when the -, is configured in transmissionmode 3! a -, shall determine 1 as defined in subclause 7...9 of <4 in each reporting interal and report the detectednumber in each 1 report to support selection between transmit diersity and large delay @++.
hen reporting P21 the -, reports either a single or a multiple P21 report. The number of >s represented by a
single -, P21 report can be +:> N or a smaller subset of >s. The number of >s represented by a single P21 report
is semi"statically configured by higher layer signalling. / -, is restricted to report P21! 1 and PT1 within a precodercodebook subset specified by a bitmap parameter codebookSubsetRestriction configured by higher layer
signalling. *or a -, configured in transmission mode '6! the bitmap parameter codebookSubsetRestriction is
configured for each @S1 process and each subframe sets (if subframe sets @S1!6C and @S1!'C are configured by
higher layers) by higher layer signaling. *or a specific precoder codebook and associated transmission mode! the bitmapcan specify all possible precoder codebook subsets from which the -, can assume the eB> may be using when the -,is configured in the releant transmission mode. @odebook subset restriction is supported for transmission modes 3! <!
7! 9 and for transmission modes ?! 5 and '6 with P21F1 reporting. The resulting number of bits for each transmission
mode is gien in Table =."'b. The bitmap forms the bit se0uence 6'3' !!!!...!c
aaaaa A − where 6a is the :S>
and '−c Aa is the 2S> and where a bit alue of &ero indicates that the P21 and 1 reporting is not allowed to
correspond to precoder(s) associated with the bit. The association of bits to precoders for the releant transmission
modes are gien as follows#
'. Transmission mode 3
a. antenna ports# bit !' =− υ υ a is associated with the precoder in Table 9.3.<..3"' of 34
corresponding to υ layers and codebook inde% 6 while bit 6a is associated with the precoder for
antenna ports in subclause 9.3.<.3 of 34.
b. < antenna ports# bit <!3!!' =− υ υ a is associated with the precoders in Table 9.3.<..3" of 34
corresponding to υ layers and codebook indices '! '3! '<! and '7 while bit 6a is associated with
the precoder for < antenna ports in subclause 9.3.<.3 of 34.
. Transmission mode <
a. antenna ports# see Table =."'c
b. < antenna ports# bitc)'('9 ia +−υ is associated with the precoder for υ layers and with codebook
inde% ci in Table 9.3.<..3" of 34.
3. Transmission modes 7 and 9
a. antenna ports# bitci
a is associated with the precoder for '=υ layer with codebook inde% ci in
Table 9.3.<..3"' of 34.
b. < antenna ports# bitci
a is associated with the precoder for '
=υ layer with codebook inde%
c
i in
Table 9.3.<..3" of 34.
<. Transmission mode ?
a. antenna ports# see Table =."'c
b. < antenna ports e%cept with alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured# bit
c)'('9 ia +−υ is associated with the precoder for υ layers and with codebook inde% ci in Table
9.3.<..3" of 34! !'=υ .
c. < antenna ports with alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured# bit')'('9 ia
+−υ
is associated with the precoder for υ layers ( U!'
∈υ
) and codebook inde% '
i and bit
)'('93 ia+−+ υ is associated with the precoder for υ layers ( U!'∈υ ) and codebook inde% i .
@odebook indices'i and i are gien in Table =..<"6/ or =..<"6>! for υ I' or respectiely.
b. < antenna ports e%cept with alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured# bit
c)'('9 ia +−υ is associated with the precoder for υ layers and with codebook inde% ci in Table
9.3.<..3" of 34.
c. < antenna ports with alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured# bit')'('9 ia
+−υ
is associated with the precoder for υ layers ( U!'∈υ ) and codebook inde%'i and bit
)'('93 ia +−+ υ is associated with the precoder for υ layers ( U<!3!!'∈υ ) and codebook inde%
i . @odebook indices'i and i are gien in Table =..<"6/! =..<"6>! =..<"6@ or =..<"6+! for
υ I'!!3 or < respectiely.
d. ? antenna ports# bit')'(' i f a +−υ is associated with the precoder for υ layers (
U?!=!9!7!<!3!!'∈υ ) and codebook inde%'i where
{ }7!<?!<<!<6!39!3!'9!6)(' =⋅ f and bit )'('73 i . a +−+ υ is associated with the precoder
for υ layers ( U<!3!!'∈υ ) and codebook inde% i where { }<?!3!'9!6)(' =⋅ . .
@odebook indices'i and i are gien in Table =..<"'! =..<"! =..<"3! =..<"<! =..<"7! =..<"9!
=..<"=! or =..<"?! for υ I'!!3!<!7!9!=! or ? respectiely.
Table 7.2-1b: $*ber of b"%s "! oebooA s$bse% res%r"%"o! b"%*a, for a,,l"able %ra!s*"ss"o!*oes
$*ber of b"%s c A
2 a!%e!!a
,or%s 4 a!%e!!a ,or%s
8 a!%e!!a
,or%sTra!s*"ss"o! *oe 3 2 4
Tra!s*"ss"o! *oe 4 4
Tra!s*"ss"o! *oe 5 4 1
Tra!s*"ss"o! *oe 6 4 1
Tra!s*"ss"o! *oe 8 4 with
alternativeCodeBookEnabledFor4TX-
r12=TRUE confi"ured6 otherwise 32
Tra!s*"ss"o! *oes 9a! 10
with
alternativeCodeBookEnabledFor4TX-
r12=TRUE confi"ured6 otherwise 41-
Table 7.2-1: sso"a%"o! of b"%s "! codebookSubSetRestriction b"%*a, %o ,reoers "! %e 2 a!%e!!a,or% oebooA of Table 6.3.4.2.3-1 "! 3
oebooA "!e>
ci$*ber of laers
υ 1 2
- a- %
1 a1 a4
2 a2 a5
3 a3 %
The set of subbands (* ) a -, shall ealuate for @E1 reporting spans the entire downlink system bandwidth. / subbandis a set of " contiguous P>s where " is a function of system bandwidth. Bote the last subband in set * may hae fewer
than " contiguous P>s depending on +:> N . The number of subbands for system bandwidth gien by +:
defined by " N N F+:>= . The subbands shall be inde%ed in the order of increasing fre0uency and non"increasing
si&es starting at the lowest fre0uency.
" *or transmission modes '! ! 3 and 7! as well as transmission modes ?! 5 and '6 without P21F1 reporting!transmission mode < with 1I'! and transmission modes ?! 5 and '6 with P21F1 reporting and 1I'! a single <"
bit wideband @E1 is reported.
" *or transmission modes 3 and <! as well as transmission modes ?! 5 and '6 with P21F1 reporting! @E1 iscalculated assuming transmission of one codeword for 1I' and two codewords for 1 Y '.
" *or 1 Y ' with transmission mode <! as well as transmission modes ?! 5 and '6 with P21F1 reporting! P-S@D based triggered reporting includes reporting a wideband @E1 which comprises#
" / <"bit wideband @E1 for codeword 6
" / <"bit wideband @E1 for codeword '
" *or 1 Y ' with transmission mode <! as well as transmission modes ?! 5 and '6 with P21F1 reporting! P-@@D based reporting includes reporting a <"bit wideband @E1 for codeword 6 and a wideband spatial differential @E1.The wideband spatial differential @E1 alue comprises#
" / 3"bit wideband spatial differential @E1 alue for codeword ' offset leel
" @odeword ' offset leel I wideband @E1 inde% for codeword 6 ; wideband @E1 inde% for codeword '.
" The mapping from the 3"bit wideband spatial differential @E1 alue to the offset leel is shown in Table =."
The term R-:F+: configuration in this subclause refers to the higher layer parameter suframeAssinment unlessspecified otherwise.
/ -, shall perform aperiodic @S1 reporting using the P-S@D in subframe n+" on sering cell c ! upon decoding insubframe n either#
" an uplink +@1 format <4! or
" a andom /ccess esponse Grant!
for sering cell c if the respectie @S1 re0uest field is set to trigger a report and is not resered.
1f the @S1 re0uest field is ' bit and the -, is configured in transmission mode '"5 and the -, is not configured with
csi#*uframeatternConfi#r$% for any sering cell! a report is triggered for sering cell c ! if the @S1 re0uest field is
set to K'K.
1f the @S1 re0uest field is ' bit and the -, is configured in transmission mode '6 and the -, is not configured with csi#
*uframeatternConfi#r$% for any sering cell! a report is triggered for a set of CSI process(es) for sering cell c corresponding to the higher layer configured set of @S1 process(es) associated with the alue of @S1 re0uest field of K6'K
in Table =..'"'>! if the @S1 re0uest field is set to K'K.
1f the @S1 re0uest field si&e is bits and the -, is configured in transmission mode '"5 for all sering cells and the -,is not configured with csi#*uframeatternConfi#r$% for any sering cell! a report is triggered according to the aluein Table =..'"'/ corresponding to aperiodic @S1 reporting.
1f the @S1 re0uest field si&e is bits and the -, is configured in transmission mode '6 for at least one sering cell andthe -, is not configured with csi#*uframeatternConfi#r$% for any sering cell! a report is triggered according to the
alue in Table =..'"'> corresponding to aperiodic @S1 reporting.1f the @S1 re0uest field is ' bit and the -, is configured with the higher layer parameter csi#*uframeatternConfi#
r$% for at least one sering cell! " a report is triggered for a set of CSI process(es) and/or {CSI process, CSI subframe
set}-pair(s) for sering cell c corresponding to the higher layer configured set of CSI process(es) and/or {CSI process,
CSI subframe set}-pair(s) associated with the alue of @S1 re0uest field of K6'K in Table =..'"'@! if the @S1 re0uest
field is set to K'K.
1f the @S1 re0uest field si&e is bits and the -, is configured with the higher layer parameter csi#
*uframeatternConfi#r$% for at least one sering cell!
a report is triggered according to the alue in Table =..'"'@ corresponding to aperiodic @S1 reporting.
*or a gien sering cell! if the -, is configured in transmission modes '"5! the 8@S1 process8 in Table =..'"'> and
Table =..'"'@ refers to the aperiodic @S1 configured for the -, on the gien sering cell. / -, is not e%pected to beconfigured by higher layers with more than 7 @S1 processes in each of the 'st and nd set of @S1 process(es) in Table
=..'"'>. / -, is not e%pected to be configured by higher layers with more than 7 @S1 processes and/or {CSI process,
CSI subframe set}-pair(s) in each of the 'st and nd set of @S1 process(es) and/or {CSI process, CSI subframe set}-
pair(s) in Table =..'"'@. / -, is not e%pected to be configured by higher layers with more than one instance of the
same @S1 process in each of the higher layer configured sets associated with the alue of @S1 re0uest field of K6'K! K'6K!and K''K in Table =..'"'> and Table =..'"'@ respectiely.
/ -, is not e%pected to receie more than one aperiodic @S1 report re0uest for a gien subframe.
1f a -, is configured with more than one @S1 process for a sering cell! the -, on reception of an aperiodic @S1 reportre0uest triggering a @S1 report according to Table =..'"'> is not e%pected to update @S1 corresponding to the @S1
reference resource (defined in subclause =..3) for all @S1 processes e%cept the )6!ma%( u & N N − lowest"inde%ed
@S1 processes for the sering cell associated with the re0uest when the -, has u N unreported @S1 processes
associated with other aperiodic @S1 re0uests for the sering cell! where a @S1 process associated with a @S1 re0uest
shall only be counted as unreported in a subframe before the subframe where the P-S@D carrying the corresponding
@S1 is transmitted! and C*0 N − is the ma%imum number of @S1 processes supported by the -, for the sering cell
and#
" for *++ sering cell C*0 & N N −=
" for T++ sering cell
" if the -, is configured with four @S1 processes for the sering cell ! C*0 & N N −=
" if the -, is configured with two or three @S1 processes for the sering cell! 3= & N .
1f more than one alue of C*0 N − is included in the !#!TRA#Capailit=! the -, assumes a alue of C*0 N −
that is consistent with its @S1 process configuration. 1f more than one consistent alue of C*0 N − e%ists! the -, may
assume any one of the consistent alues.
1f a -, is configured with multiple cell groups! and if the -, receies multiple aperiodic @S1 report re0uests in asubframe for different cell groups triggering more than one @S1 report! the -, is not re0uired to update @S1 for morethan 7 @S1 processes from the @S1 processes corresponding to all the triggered @S1 reports.
B-1B Aperiodic S$ report is tri""ered for a set of S$ process0es and'or DS$ process6 S$ subframe
setE%pair0s confi"ured by hi"her layers for servin" cell c
B1-B Aperiodic S$ report is tri""ered for a 1st set of S$ process0es and'or DS$ process6 S$ subframesetE%pair0s confi"ured by hi"her layers
B11B Aperiodic S$ report is tri""ered for a 2nd set of S$ process0es and'or DS$ process6 S$ subframe
setE%pair0s confi"ured by hi"her layers
BMT,# P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 formats used to grant P-S@D transmissions as gien by +@1 format 6 and+@1 format < are herein referred to as uplink +@1 format when common behaiour is addressed.
hen the @S1 re0uest field from an uplink +@1 format is set to trigger a report! for *++ "1@! and for T++ -:F+:
configuration '"9! " is gien in Table ?". *or T++ -:F+: configuration 6! if the 2S> of the -: inde% is set to ' and:S> of the -: inde% is set to 6! " is gien in Table ?" or if 2S> of the -: inde% is set to 6 and :S> of the -: inde%is set to '! " is e0ual to = or if both 2S> and :S> of the -: inde% is set to '! " is gien in Table ?".
*or T++! if a -, is configured with more than one sering cell and if the -:F+: configurations of at least two sering
cells are different! or if the -, is configured with the parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for at least onesering cell! or for *++"T++ and sering cell frame structure type ! the 8T++ -:F+: @onfiguration8 gien in Table
?" refers to the -:"reference -:F+: configuration (defined in subclause ?.6).
hen the @S1 re0uest field from a andom /ccess esponse Grant is set to trigger a report and is not resered! " is
e0ual to '" if the -: delay field in subclause 9. is set to &ero! where '" is gien in subclause 9.'.'. The -, shall
postpone aperiodic @S1 reporting to the ne%t aailable -: subframe if the -: delay field is set to '.
The minimum reporting interal for aperiodic reporting of @E1 and P21 and 1 is ' subframe. The subband si&e for
@E1 shall be the same for transmitter"receier configurations with and without precoding.
1f a -, is not configured for simultaneous P-S@D and P-@@D transmission! when aperiodic @S1 report with notransport block associated as defined in subclause ?.9. and positie S is transmitted in the same subframe! the -,shall transmit S! and! if applicable! D/E"/@C! on P-@@D resources as described in subclause '6.'
/ -, is semi"statically configured by higher layers to feed back @E1 and P21 and corresponding 1 on the sameP-S@D using one of the following @S1 reporting modes gien in Table =..'"' and described below.
Transmission mode ? # 2odes '"! "! 3"'! 3" if the -, is configured with P21F1 reporting modes "6! 3"6 ifthe -, is configured without P21F1 reporting
Transmission mode 5 # 2odes '"! "! 3"'! 3" if the -, is configured with P21F1 reporting and number of@S1"S ports Y ' modes "6! 3"6 if the -, is configured without P21F1 reporting ornumber of @S1"S portsI'
Transmission mode '6 # 2odes '"! "! 3"'! 3" if the -, is configured with P21F1 reporting and number of
@S1"S ports Y ' modes "6! 3"6 if the -, is configured without P21F1 reporting ornumber of @S1"S portsI'.
The aperiodic @S1 reporting mode is gien by the parameter ci#Report)odeAperiodic which is configured by higher"layer signalling.
*or a sering cell with =+:
> ≤ N ! P-S@D reporting modes are not supported for that sering cell.
1 is only reported for transmission modes 3 and <! as well as transmission modes ?! 5 and '6 with P21F1 reporting.
*or sering cell c ! a -, configured in transmission mode '6 with P21F1 reporting for a @S1 process can be
configured with a K1"reference @S1 processK for the @S1 process. 1f the -, is configured with a K1"reference @S1 processK for the @S1 process! the reported 1 for the @S1 process shall be the same as the reported 1 for the configuredK1"reference @S1 processK. The 1 for the K1"reference @S1 processK is not based on any other configured @S1 processother than the K1"reference @S1 processK. The -, is not e%pected to receie an aperiodic @S1 report re0uest for a gien
subframe triggering a @S1 report including @S1 associated with the @S1 process and not including @S1 associated withthe configured K1"reference @S1 processK. 1f the -, is configured with a K1"reference @S1 processK for a @S1 process
and if subframe sets @S1!6C and @S1!'C are configured by higher layers for only one of the @S1 processes then the
-, is not e%pected to receie configuration for the @S1 process configured with the subframe subsets that hae adifferent set of restricted 1s with precoder codebook subset restriction between the two subframe sets. The -, is not
e%pected to receie configurations for the @S1 process and the K1"reference @S1 processK that hae a different#
" /periodic @S1 reporting mode! andFor
" number of @S1"S antenna ports! andFor
" set of restricted 1s with precoder codebook subset restriction if subframe sets @S1!6C and @S1!'C are not
configured by higher layers for both @S1 processes! andFor
" set of restricted 1s with precoder codebook subset restriction for each subframe set if subframe sets @S1!6C
and @S1!'C are configured by higher layers for both @S1 processes! andFor
" set of restricted 1s with precoder codebook subset restriction if subframe sets @S1!6C and @S1!'C are
configured by higher layers for only one of the @S1 processes! and the set of restricted 1s for the two subframesets are the same.
/ 1 report for a sering cell on an aperiodic reporting mode is alid only for @E1FP21 report for that sering cell onthat aperiodic reporting mode
• ideband feedback
o 2ode '" description#
*or each subband a preferred precoding matri% is selected from the codebook subset
assuming transmission only in the subband
/ -, shall report one wideband @E1 alue per codeword which is calculated assuming
the use of the corresponding selected precoding matri% in each subband andtransmission on set * subbands.
The -, shall report the selected precoding matri% indicator for each set * subband
e%cept with ? @S1"S ports configured for transmission modes 5 and '6 or withalternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured for transmission modes ?!
5 and '6! in which case a first precoding matri% indicator 'i is reported for the set *
subbands and a second precoding matri% indicator i is reported for each set *
subband.
Subband si&e is gien by Table =..'"3.
*or transmission modes <! ?! 5 and '6! the reported P21 and @E1 alues are calculated
conditioned on the reported 1. *or other transmission modes they are reportedconditioned on rank '.
• Digher :ayer"configured subband feedback
o 2ode 3"6 description#
/ -, shall report a wideband @E1 alue which is calculated assuming transmission on
set * subbands
The -, shall also report one subband @E1 alue for each set * subband. The subband
@E1 alue is calculated assuming transmission only in the subband
>oth the wideband and subband @E1 represent channel 0uality for the first codeword!
een when 1Y'.
*or transmission mode 3 the reported @E1 alues are calculated conditioned on the
reported 1. *or other transmission modes they are reported conditioned on rank '.
o 2ode 3"' description#
/ single precoding matri% is selected from the codebook subset assuming transmission
on set S subbands
/ -, shall report one subband @E1 alue per codeword for each set * subband which
are calculated assuming the use of the single precoding matri% in all subbands and
assuming transmission in the corresponding subband.
/ -, shall report a wideband @E1 alue per codeword which is calculated assuming the
use of the single precoding matri% in all subbands and transmission on set * subbands
The -, shall report the selected single precoding matri% indicator e%cept with ? @S1"
S ports configured for transmission modes 5 and '6 or with
alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured for transmission modes ?!5 and '6! in which case a first and second precoding matri% indicator are reportedcorresponding to the selected single precoding matri%.
*or transmission modes <! ?! 5 and '6! the reported P21 and @E1 alues are calculated
conditioned on the reported 1. *or other transmission modes they are reportedconditioned on rank '.
*or each subband a preferred precoding matri% is selected from the codebook subset
assuming transmission only in the subband
/ -, shall report one wideband @E1 alue per codeword which is calculated assuming
the use of the corresponding selected precoding matri% in each subband andtransmission on set * subbands.
/ -, shall report the selected single precoding matri% indicator for each set * subband
e%cept with ? @S1"S ports configured for transmission mode 5 and '6! or withalternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured for transmission modes ?!5 and '6! in which case the -, shall report a first precoding matri% indicator for all set* subbands and also report a second precoding matri% indicator for each set S subband.
/ -, shall report one subband @E1 alue per codeword for each set * subband
reflecting transmission oer the single subband and using the selected precoding matri%in the corresponding subband.
*or transmission modes <! ?! 5 and '6! the reported P21 and @E1 alues are calculatedconditioned on the reported 1. *or transmission mode 9 they are reported conditionedon rank '.
o Subband @E1 alue for each codeword are encoded differentially with respect to their respectie
wideband @E1 using "bits as defined by
Subband differential @E1 offset leel I subband @E1 inde% ; wideband @E1 inde%. The
mapping from the "bit subband differential @E1 alue to the offset leel is shown in
The -, shall also report one @E1 alue reflecting transmission only oer the ) selected
subbands determined in the preious step. The @E1 represents channel 0uality for thefirst codeword! een when 1Y'.
/dditionally! the -, shall also report one wideband @E1 alue which is calculated
assuming transmission on set * subbands. The wideband @E1 represents channel 0uality
for the first codeword! een when 1Y'.
*or transmission mode 3 the reported @E1 alues are calculated conditioned on the
reported 1. *or other transmission modes they are reported conditioned on rank '.
o 2ode " description#
The -, shall perform joint selection of the set of ) preferred subbands of si&e " within
the set of subbands * and a preferred single precoding matri% selected from thecodebook subset that is preferred to be used for transmission oer the ) selectedsubbands.
The -, shall report one @E1 alue per codeword reflecting transmission only oer the
selected ) preferred subbands and using the same selected single precoding matri% in
each of the ) subbands.
,%cept with ? @S1"S ports configured for transmission modes 5 and '6 or with
alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured for transmission modes ?!5 and '6! the -, shall also report the selected single precoding matri% indicator preferred for the 2 selected subbands. / -, shall also report the selected single precoding matri% indicator for all set * subbands.
*or transmission modes 5 and '6 with ? @S1"S ports configured and for transmission
modes ?! 5 and '6 with alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured! a-, shall report a first precoding matri% indicator for all set * subbands. / -, shall alsoreport a second precoding matri% indicator for all set * subbands and another second precoding matri% indicator for the 2 selected subbands.
/ single precoding matri% is selected from the codebook subset assuming transmission
on set S subbands
/ -, shall report a wideband @E1 alue per codeword which is calculated assuming the
use of the single precoding matri% in all subbands and transmission on set * subbands
*or transmission modes <! ?! 5 and '6! the reported P21 and @E1 alues are calculated
conditioned on the reported 1. *or other transmission modes they are reportedconditioned on rank '.
o *or all -,"selected subband feedback modes the -, shall report the positions of the ) selected
subbands using a combinatorial inde% r defined as
'
6
) i
i
N sr ) i
−
=
−=−∑
where the set { } '
6
)
i i s
−
=! ( '' !i i i s N s s +≤ ≤ < ) contains the ) sorted subband indices and
<
≥
=
= &
= & =
&
=
&
6
is the e%tended binomial coefficient! resulting in uni0ue label
−
∈ '!!6
)
N r .
o The @E1 alue for the ) selected subbands for each codeword is encoded differentially using "bits
relatie to its respectie wideband @E1 as defined by
/ -, is semi"statically configured by higher layers to periodically feed back different @S1 components (@E1! P21! PT1!andFor 1) on the P-@@D using the reporting modes gien in Table =.."' and described below. / -, in transmissionmode '6 can be configured by higher layers for multiple periodic @S1 reports corresponding to one or more @S1 processes per sering cell on P-@@D.
Transmission mode ? # 2odes '"'! "' if the -, is configured with P21F1 reporting modes '"6! "6 if the -, isconfigured without P21F1 reporting
Transmission mode 5 # 2odes '"'! "' if the -, is configured with P21F1 reporting and number of @S1"S portsY' modes '"6! "6 if the -, is configured without P21F1 reporting or number of@S1"S portsI'.
Transmission mode '6 # 2odes '"'! "' if the -, is configured with P21F1 reporting and number of @S1"S
portsY' modes '"6! "6 if the -, is configured without P21F1 reporting or number of@S1"S portsI'.
*or a -, configured in transmission mode '"5! one periodic @S1 reporting mode for each sering cell is configured byhigher"layer signalling.
*or a -, configured in transmission mode '6! one or more periodic @S1 reporting modes for each sering cell areconfigured by higher"layer signalling.
*or a -, configured with transmission mode 5 or '6! and with ? @S1"S ports! mode '"' is configured to be either
submode ' or submode ia higher"layer signaling using the parameter !CC-<format$#$<C*0<reportin<mode.
*or a -, configured with transmission mode ?! 5 or '6! and with alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR!
configured! mode '"' is configured to be either submode ' or submode ia higher"layer signaling using the parameter !CC-<format$#$<C*0<reportin<mode.
*or the -,"selected subband @E1! a @E1 report in a certain subframe of a certain sering cell describes the channel0uality in a particular part or in particular parts of the bandwidth of that sering cell described subse0uently as bandwidth part (>P) or parts. The bandwidth parts shall be inde%ed in the order of increasing fre0uency and non"increasing si&es starting at the lowest fre0uency.
*or each sering cell
" There are a total of N subbands for a sering cell system bandwidth gien by +:> N where " N F
+:> subbands
are of si&e ". 1f 6FF +:
>+:> >− " N " N then one of the subbands is of si&e " N " N F
" / bandwidth part ( is fre0uency"consecutie and consists of j N subbands where bandwidth parts span * or
+:> N as gien in Table =..". 1f ' = then j N is " N FF+:
> . 1f B$ then j N is either " N FF+:>
or 'FF+:> − " N ! depending on +:
> N ! " and .
" ,ach bandwidth part (! where 6 Z ( Z "'! is scanned in se0uential order according to increasing fre0uency.
" *or -, selected subband feedback a single subband out of j N subbands of a bandwidth part is selected along
with a corresponding L"bit label inde%ed in the order of increasing fre0uency! where +:
>log F F L N " = .
The @E1 and P21 payload si&es of each P-@@D @S1 reporting mode are gien in Table =.."3.
The following @E1FP21 and 1 reporting types with distinct periods and offsets are supported for the P-@@D @S1reporting modes gien in Table =.."3#
" Type ' report supports @E1 feedback for the -, selected sub"bands
" Type 'a report supports subband @E1 and second P21 feedback
" Type ! Type b! and Type c report supports wideband @E1 and P21 feedback
" Type a report supports wideband P21 feedback
" Type 3 report supports 1 feedback
" Type < report supports wideband @E1
" Type 7 report supports 1 and wideband P21 feedback
" Type 9 report supports 1 and PT1 feedback
*or a -, configured in transmission mode '"5 and for each sering cell! or for a -, configured in transmission mode
'6 and for each @S1 process in each sering cell! the periodicity pd N (in subframes) and offset !433*T C50 N (in
subframes) for @E1FP21 reporting are determined based on the parameter ci#pmi#Confi0nde& 0 FC50 )0 0 gien in
Table =.."'/ for *++ or for *++"T++ with primary cell frame structure ' and Table =.."'@ for T++ or for *++"
T++ and primary cell frame structure type . The periodicity R0 ) and relatie offset !433*T R0 N for 1 reporting are
determined based on the parameter ri#Confi0nde& 0 R0 0 gien in Table =.."'>. >oth ci#pmi#Confi0nde& and ri#
Confi0nde& are configured by higher layer signalling. The relatie reporting offset for 1 !433*T R0 N takes alues
from the set )U'(!...!'!6 −−− pd N . 1f a -, is configured to report for more than one @S1 subframe set then
parameter ci#pmi#Confi0nde& and ri#Confi0nde& respectiely correspond to the @E1FP21 and 1 periodicity andrelatie reporting offset for subframe set ' and ci#pmi#Confi0nde&% and ri#Confi0nde& respectiely correspond tothe @E1FP21 and 1 periodicity and relatie reporting offset for subframe set . *or a -, configured with transmissionmode '6! the parameters ci#pmi#Confi0nde& ! ri#Confi0nde&! ci#pmi#Confi0nde&% and ri#Confi0nde& can be
configured for each @S1 process.
1n the case where wideband @E1FP21 reporting is configured#
" The reporting instances for wideband @E1FP21 are subframes satisfying
6modF'6 ! =−+× pd C50 433*T s f N N nn .
" 1n case 1 reporting is configured! the reporting interal of the 1 reporting is an integer multiple R0 ) of period
pd N (in subframes).
" The reporting instances for 1 are subframes satisfying
6modF'6 !! =⋅−−+× R0 pd R0 433*T C50 433*T s f ) N N N nn .
1n the case where both wideband @E1FP21 and subband @E1 (or subband @E1Fsecond P21 for transmission modes 5and '6) reporting are configured#
" The reporting instances for wideband @E1FP21 and subband @E1 (or subband @E1Fsecond P21 for transmission
modes 5 and '6) are subframes satisfying 6modF'6 ! =−+× pd C50 433*T s f N N nn .
hen PT1 is not transmitted (due to not being configured) or the most recently transmitted PT1 is
e0ual to ' for a -, configured in transmission modes ? and 5! or for a -, configured in transmissionmode '6 without a K1"reference @S1 processK for a @S1 process! or the transmitted PT1 is e0ual to '
reported in the most recent 1 reporting instance for a @S1 process when a -, is configured intransmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1 processK for the @S1 process! or the transmitted PT1 ise0ual to ' for a K1"reference @S1 processK reported in the most recent 1 reporting instance for a @S1 process when a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with the K1"reference @S1 processK for the@S1 process! and the most recent type 9 report for the @S1 process is dropped#
The wideband @E1F wideband P21 (or wideband @E1Fwideband second P21 for
transmission modes ?! 5 and '6) report has period pd N - ⋅ ! and is reported on the
subframes satisfying 6modF'6 ! =⋅−+× pd C50 433*T s f N - N nn . The
integer - is defined as ' - 2 = × + ! where is the number of bandwidth parts.
>etween eery two consecutie wideband @E1F wideband P21 (or wideband
@E1Fwideband second P21 for transmission modes ?! 5 and '6) reports! theremaining 2 × reporting instances are used in se0uence for subband @E1 (or
subband @E1Fsecond P21 for transmission modes 5 and '6) reports on 2 fullcycles of bandwidth parts e%cept when the gap between two consecutie wideband
@E1FP21 reports contains less than 2 × reporting instances due to a system frame
number transition to 6! in which case the -, shall not transmit the remainder of thesubband @E1 (or subband @E1Fsecond P21 for transmission modes 5 and '6)reports which hae not been transmitted before the second of the two wideband@E1F wideband P21 (or wideband @E1Fwideband second P21 for transmissionmodes ?! 5 and '6) reports. ,ach full cycle of bandwidth parts shall be in increasing
order starting from bandwidth part 6 to bandwidth part ' − . The parameter 2 is
configured by higher"layer signalling.
hen the most recently transmitted PT1 is 6 for a -, configured in transmission modes ? and 5 or for a -, configured in transmission mode '6 without a K1"reference @S1 processK for a @S1 process! orthe transmitted PT1 is 6 reported in the most recent 1 reporting instance for a @S1 process when a -,is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1 processK for the @S1 process! or thetransmitted PT1 is 6 for a K1"reference @S1 processK reported in the most recent 1 reporting instancefor a @S1 process when a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with the K1"reference @S1 processK for the @S1 process! and the most recent type 9 report for the @S1 process is dropped#
The wideband first precoding matri% indicator report has period pd N - ⋅′ ! and is
reported on the subframes satisfying
6modF'6 ! =⋅′−+× pd C50 433*T s f N - N nn ! where - ′ is signalled
by higher layers.
>etween eery two consecutie wideband first precoding matri% indicator reports!
the remaining reporting instances are used for a wideband second precoding matri%
indicator with wideband @E1 as described below
" 1n case 1 reporting is configured! the reporting interal of 1 is R0 ) times the wideband @E1FP21 period
pd N - ⋅ ! and 1 is reported on the same P-@@D cyclic shift resource as both the wideband @E1FP21 and
subband @E1 reports.
The reporting instances for 1 are subframes satisfying
6modF'6 !! =⋅⋅−−+× R0 pd R0 433*T C50 433*T s f ) N - N N nn
1n case of collision of a @S1 report with P-@@D reporting type 3! 7! or 9 of one sering cell with a @S1 report withP-@@D reporting type '! 'a! ! a! b! c! or < of the same sering cell the latter @S1 report with P-@@D reportingtype ('! 'a! ! a! b! c! or <) has lower priority and is dropped.
*or a sering cell and -, configured in transmission mode '6! in case of collision between @S1 reports of same seringcell with P-@@D reporting type of the same priority! and the @S1 reports corresponding to different @S1 processes! the@S1 reports corresponding to all @S1 processes e%cept the @S1 process with the lowest csi#rocess0d#r$$ are dropped.
*or a sering cell and -, configured in transmission mode '"5 and configured with @S1 subframe sets @S1!6C and
@S1!'C by the higher layer parameter csi#*uframeatternConfi#r$% for the sering cell, in case of collision between
@S1 reports of same sering cell with P-@@D reporting type of the same priority! the @S1 report corresponding to @S1
subframe set @S1!'C is dropped.
*or a sering cell and -, configured in transmission mode '6 and configured with @S1 subframe sets @S1!6C and
@S1!'C by the higher layer parameter csi#*uframeatternConfi#r$% for the sering cell, in case of collision between
@S1 reports of same sering cell with P-@@D reporting type of the same priority and the @S1 reports corresponding to
@S1 processes with same csi#rocess0d#r$$! the @S1 report corresponding to @S1 subframe set @S1!'C is dropped.
1f the -, is configured with more than one sering cell! the -, transmits a @S1 report of only one sering cell in anygien subframe. *or a gien subframe! in case of collision of a @S1 report with P-@@D reporting type 3! 7! 9! or a ofone sering cell with a @S1 report with P-@@D reporting type '! 'a! ! b! c! or < of another sering cell! the latter
@S1 with P-@@D reporting type ('! 'a! ! b! c! or <) has lower priority and is dropped. *or a gien subframe! in caseof collision of @S1 report with P-@@D reporting type ! b! c! or < of one sering cell with @S1 report with P-@@D
reporting type ' or 'a of another sering cell! the latter @S1 report with P-@@D reporting type '! or 'a has lower priority and is dropped.*or a gien subframe and sering cells with -, configured in transmission mode '"5! in case of collision between @S1reports of these different sering cells with P-@@D reporting type of the same priority! the @S1 reports for all thesesering cells e%cept the sering cell with lowest *ervCell0nde& are dropped.
*or a gien subframe and sering cells with -, configured in transmission mode '6! in case of collision between @S1reports of different sering cells with P-@@D reporting type of the same priority and the @S1 reports corresponding to@S1 processes with same csi#rocess0d#r$$! the @S1 reports of all sering cells e%cept the sering cell with lowest*ervCell0nde& are dropped.
*or a gien subframe and sering cells with -, configured in transmission mode '6! in case of collision between @S1reports of different sering cells with P-@@D reporting type of the same priority and the @S1 reports corresponding to@S1 processes with different csi#rocess0d#r$$! the @S1 reports of all sering cells e%cept the sering cell with @S1reports corresponding to @S1 process with the lowest csi#rocess0d#r$$ are dropped.
*or a gien subframe! in case of collision between @S1 report of a gien sering cell with -, configured in
transmission mode '"5! and @S1 report(s) corresponding to @S1 process(es) of a different sering cell with the -,configured in transmission mode '6! and the @S1 reports of the sering cells with P-@@D reporting type of the same priority! the @S1 report(s) corresponding to @S1 process(es) with csi#rocess0d#r$$ Y ' of the different sering cell aredropped.
*or a gien subframe! in case of collision between @S1 report of a gien sering cell with -, configured in
transmission mode '"5! and @S1 report corresponding to @S1 process with csi#rocess0d#r$$ I ' of a different sering
cell with the -, configured in transmission mode '6! and the @S1 reports of the sering cells with P-@@D reportingtype of the same priority! the @S1 report of the sering cell with highest *ervCell0nde& is dropped.
See subclause '6.' for -, behaiour regarding collision between @S1 and D/E"/@C and the corresponding P-@@Dformat assignment.
The @S1 report of a gien P-@@D reporting type shall be transmitted on the P-@@D resource)Q!(
P-@@D
pn as defined in
34! where)Q!(
P-@@D
pn is -, specific and configured by higher layers for each sering cell.
1f the -, is not configured for simultaneous P-S@D and P-@@D transmission or! if the -, is configured for simultaneous P-S@D and P-@@D transmission and not transmitting P-S@D! in case of collision between @S1 and
*or T++ or *++"T++ and primary cell frame structure type periodic @E1FP21 reporting! the following periodicityalues apply for a sering cell c depending on the T++ -:F+: configuration of the primary cell 34! where the -:F+:configuration corresponds to the eimta#-AR5#ReferenceConfi#r$% for the primary cell if the -, is configured with the parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for the primary cell#
" The reporting period of '= pd N is applicable for the sering cell c only if T++ -:F+: configuration of the
primary cell belongs to 6! '! 3! <! 9U! and where all -: subframes of the primary cell in a radio frame are usedfor @E1FP21 reporting.
" The reporting period of 7= pd N is applicable for the sering cell c only if T++ -:F+: configuration of the
primary cell belongs to 6! '! ! 9U.
" The reporting periods of U'96!?6!<6!6!'6= pd N are applicable for the sering cell c for any T++
-:F+: configuration of the primary cell.
*or a sering cell with =+:
> ≤ N ! 2ode "6 and 2ode "' are not supported for that sering cell.
The sub"sampled codebook for P-@@D mode '"' submode for ? @S1"S ports is defined in Table =.."'+ for first
and second precoding matri% indicator 'i and i . [oint encoding of rank and first precoding matri% indicator 'i forP-@@D mode '"' submode ' for ? @S1"S ports is defined in Table =.."',. The sub"sampled codebook for P-@@Dmode "' for ? @S1"S ports is defined in Table =.."'* for P-@@D eporting Type 'a.
The sub"sampled codebook for P-@@D mode '"' submode for transmission modes ?! 5 and '6 configured withalternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! is defined in Table =.."G for first and second precoding matri%
indicator 'i and i . [oint encoding of rank and first precoding matri% indicator 'i for P-@@D mode '"' submode 'for transmission modes ?! 5 and '6 configured with alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! is defined inTable =.."'D. The sub"sampled codebook for P-@@D mode "' for transmission modes ?! 5 and '6 configured withalternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! is defined in Table =.."'1 for P-@@D eporting Type 'a.
/n 1 or PT1 or any precoding matri% indicator reported for a sering cell in a periodic reporting mode is alid only for@S1 reports for that sering cell on that periodic @S1 reporting mode.
*or sering cell c ! a -, configured in transmission mode '6 with P21F1 reporting for a @S1 process can be
configured with a K1"reference @S1 processK. The 1 for the K1"reference @S1 processK is not based on any otherconfigured @S1 process other than the K1"reference @S1 processK. 1f the -, is configured with a K1"reference @S1
processK for a @S1 process and if subframe sets @S1!6C and @S1!'C are configured by higher layers for only one of the
@S1 processes then the -, is not e%pected to receie configuration for the @S1 process configured with the subframe
subsets that hae a different set of restricted 1s with precoder codebook subset restriction between the two subframesets.The -, is not e%pected to receie configurations for the @S1 process and the K1"reference @S1 processK that hae adifferent#
" periodic @S1 reporting mode (including sub-mode if configured)! andFor
" number of @S1"S antenna ports! andFor
" set of restricted 1s with precoder codebook subset restriction if subframe sets @S1!6C and @S1!'C are not
configured by higher layers for both @S1 processes! andFor
" set of restricted 1s with precoder codebook subset restriction for each subframe set if subframe sets @S1!6C
and @S1!'C are configured by higher layers for both @S1 processes! andFor
" set of restricted 1s with precoder codebook subset restriction if subframe sets @S1!6C and @S1!'C are
configured by higher layers for only one of the @S1 processes! and the set of restricted 1s for the two subframesets are the same.
*or the calculation of @E1FP21 conditioned on the last reported 1! in the absence of a last reported 1 the -, shall
conduct the @E1FP21 calculation conditioned on the lowest possible 1 as gien by the bitmap parametercodebookSubsetRestriction and the parameter alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$% if configured. 1f
reporting for more than one @S1 subframe set is configured! @E1FP21 is conditioned on the last reported 1 linked to
the same subframe set as the @S1 report.
• ideband feedback
o 2ode '"6 description#
1n the subframe where 1 is reported (only for transmission mode 3)#
• / -, shall determine a 1 assuming transmission on set * subbands.
• The -, shall report a type 3 report consisting of one 1.
• / -, shall report a type < report consisting of one wideband @E1 alue which
is calculated assuming transmission on set * subbands. The wideband @E1represents channel 0uality for the first codeword! een when 1Y'.
• *or transmission mode 3 the @E1 is calculated conditioned on the last reported
periodic 1. *or other transmission modes it is calculated conditioned on
transmission rank '.
o 2ode '"' description#
1n the subframe where 1 is reported (only for transmission modes <! ?! 5 and '6)#
• 1f a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1
processK for a @S1 process! the 1 for the @S1 process shall be the same as the1 in the most recent @S1 report comprising 1 for the configured K1"reference@S1 processK irrespectie of subframe sets if configured otherwise! the -,shall determine a 1 assuming transmission on set * subbands.
• The -, shall report a type 3 report consisting of one 1.
1n the subframe where 1 and a first P21 are reported for transmission modes 5 and '6
configured with submode ' and ? @S1"S ports! and for transmission modes ?! 5 and '6configured with submode ' and alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! #
• 1f a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1
processK for a @S1 process! the 1 for the @S1 process shall be the same as the
1 in the most recent @S1 report comprising 1 for the configured K1"reference@S1 processK irrespectie of subframe sets if configured otherwise! the -,shall determine a 1 assuming transmission on set * subbands.
• The -, shall report a type 7 report consisting of jointly coded 1 and a first
P21 corresponding to a set of precoding matrices selected from the codebooksubset assuming transmission on set * subbands.
• 1f the -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1 processK for a @S1 process and in case of collision of type 7 report for the @S1 process with type 7 report for the K1"reference @S1 processK! the wideband firstP21 for the @S1 process shall be the same as the wideband first P21 in themost recent type 7 report for the configured K1"reference @S1 processKotherwise! the wideband first P21 alue is calculated conditioned on the
reported periodic 1.
1n the subframe where @E1FP21 is reported for all transmission modes e%cept with ?
@S1"S ports configured for transmission modes 5 and '6! or withalternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured for transmission modes ?!5 and '6#
• / single precoding matri% is selected from the codebook subset assuming
transmission on set * subbands.
• / -, shall report a type report consisting of
o / single wideband @E1 alue which is calculated assuming the use of
a single precoding matri% in all subbands and transmission on set *
subbands.
o The selected single P21 (wideband P21).
o hen 1Y'! an additional 3"bit wideband spatial differential @E1!
which is shown in Table =.".
• *or transmission modes <! ?! 5 and '6!
o 1f a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a NK1"reference@S1 processOK for a @S1 process! and the most recent type 3 report forthe @S1 process is dropped! and a type 3 report for the NK1"reference@S1 processOK is reported in the most recent 1 reporting instance for
the @S1 process! the P21 and @E1 for the @S1 process are calculatedconditioned on the reported periodic 1 for the configured NK1"reference @S1 processOK in the most recent 1 reporting instance forthe @S1 process otherwise the P21 and @E1 are calculated
conditioned on the last reported periodic 1.
• *or other transmission modes the P21 and @E1 are calculated conditioned on
transmission rank '.
1n the subframe where wideband @E1Fsecond P21 is reported for transmission modes 5
and '6 with ? @S1"S ports and submode ' configured and for transmission modes ?! 5and '6 with submode ' and alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured#
• / single precoding matri% is selected from the codebook subset assuming
transmission on set * subbands.
• / -, shall report a type b report consisting of
o / single wideband @E1 alue which is calculated assuming the use of
the single precoding matri% in all subbands and transmission on set * subbands.
o The wideband second P21 corresponding to the selected single
precoding matri%.
o hen 1Y'! an additional 3"bit wideband spatial differential @E1!
which is shown in Table =.".
• 1f a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1
processK for a @S1 process! and the most recent type 7 report for the @S1 process is dropped! and a type 7 report for the K1"reference @S1 processK isreported in the most recent 1 reporting instance for the @S1 process!
o The wideband second P21 alue for the @S1 process is calculated
conditioned on the reported periodic 1 and the wideband first P21
for the configured K1"reference @S1 processK in the most recent 1reporting instance for the @S1 process.
o The wideband @E1 alue is calculated conditioned on the selected
precoding matri% for the @S1 process and the reported periodic 1 forthe configured K1"reference @S1 processK in the most recent 1reporting instance for the @S1 process.
• Mtherwise!
o The wideband second P21 alue is calculated conditioned on the last
reported periodic 1 and the wideband first P21.
o The wideband @E1 alue is calculated conditioned on the selected
precoding matri% and the last reported periodic 1.
1n the subframe where wideband @E1Ffirst P21Fsecond P21 is reported for transmission
modes 5 and '6 with ? @S1"S ports and submode configured! and for transmissionmodes ?! 5 and '6 with submode and alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#
r$%1TR! configured#
• / single precoding matri% is selected from the codebook subset assuming
transmission on set * subbands.
• / -, shall report a type c report consisting of
o / single wideband @E1 alue which is calculated assuming the use of
a single precoding matri% in all subbands and transmission on set * subbands.
o The wideband first P21 and the wideband second P21 corresponding
to the selected single precoding matri% as defined in subclause =..<.
o hen 1Y'! an additional 3"bit wideband spatial differential @E1!
• 1f a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1
processK for a @S1 process! and the most recent type 3 report for the @S1 process is dropped! and a type 3 report for the K1"reference @S1 processK is
reported in the most recent 1 reporting instance for the @S1 process! thewideband first P21! the wideband second P21 and the wideband @E1 for the@S1 process are calculated conditioned on the reported periodic 1 for the
configured K1"reference @S1 processK in the most recent 1 reporting instancefor the @S1 process otherwise the wideband first P21! the wideband secondP21 and the wideband @E1 are calculated conditioned on the last reported
periodic 1.
• -, Selected subband feedback
o 2ode "6 description#
1n the subframe where 1 is reported (only for transmission mode 3)#
• / -, shall determine a 1 assuming transmission on set * subbands.
• The -, shall report a type 3 report consisting of one 1.
1n the subframe where wideband @E1 is reported#
• The -, shall report a type < report on each respectie successie reporting
opportunity consisting of one wideband @E1 alue which is calculatedassuming transmission on set * subbands. The wideband @E1 representschannel 0uality for the first codeword! een when 1Y'.
• *or transmission mode 3 the @E1 is calculated conditioned on the last reported
periodic 1. *or other transmission modes it is calculated conditioned ontransmission rank '.
1n the subframe where @E1 for the selected subbands is reported#
• The -, shall select the preferred subband within the set of j N subbands in
each of the bandwidth parts where is gien in Table =..".
• The -, shall report a type ' report consisting of one @E1 alue reflecting
transmission only oer the selected subband of a bandwidth part determined inthe preious step along with the corresponding preferred subband L"bit label. /type ' report for each bandwidth part will in turn be reported in respectiesuccessie reporting opportunities. The @E1 represents channel 0uality for the
first codeword! een when 1Y'.
• *or transmission mode 3 the preferred subband selection and @E1 alues are
calculated conditioned on the last reported periodic 1. *or other transmissionmodes they are calculated conditioned on transmission rank '.
o 2ode "' description#
1n the subframe where 1 is reported for transmission mode <! transmission mode ?
e%cept with alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured , transmissionmodes 5 and '6 with @S1"S ports! and transmission modes 5 and '6 with < @S1"S
ports e%cept with alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured#
• 1fa -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1 processK
for a @S1 process! the 1 for the @S1 process shall be the same as the 1 in themost recent @S1 report comprising 1 for the configured K1"reference @S1 processK irrespectie of subframe sets if configured otherwise! the -, shall
determine a 1 assuming transmission on set * subbands.
• The -, shall report a type 3 report consisting of one 1.
1n the subframe where 1 is reported for transmission modes 5 and '6 with ? @S1"S
ports configured and for transmission modes ?! 5 and '6 withalternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured then#
• 1f a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1
processK for a @S1 process! the 1 for the @S1 process shall be the same as the
1 in the most recent @S1 report comprising 1 for the configured K1"reference
@S1 processK irrespectie of subframe sets if configured otherwise! the -,shall determine a 1 assuming transmission on set * subbands.
• 1f a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1
processK for a @S1 process! the PT1 for the @S1 process shall be the same as thePT1 in the most recent type 9 report for the configured K1"reference @S1
processK otherwise! the -, shall determine a precoder type indication (PT1).
• The PT1 for the @S1 process shall be e0ual to ' if the 1 reported jointly with
the PT1 is greater than for transmission modes ?! 5! '6 withalternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured.
• The -, shall report a type 9 report consisting of one 1 and the PT1.
1n the subframe where wideband @E1FP21 is reported for all transmission modes e%cept
with ? @S1"S ports configured for transmission modes 5 and '6! or withalternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured for transmission modes ?!
5 and '6#
• / single precoding matri% is selected from the codebook subset assuming
transmission on set * subbands.
• / -, shall report a type report on each respectie successie reporting
opportunity consisting of#
o / wideband @E1 alue which is calculated assuming the use of a
single precoding matri% in all subbands and transmission on set * subbands.
o The selected single P21 (wideband P21).
o hen 1Y'! an additional 3"bit wideband spatial differential @E1!
which is shown in Table =.".
• *or transmission modes <! ?! 5 and '6!
o 1f a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference
@S1 processK for a @S1 process! and the most recent type 3 report forthe @S1 process is dropped! and a type 3 report for the K1"reference@S1 processK is reported in the most recent 1 reporting instance forthe @S1 process! the P21 and @E1 alues for the @S1 process arecalculated conditioned on the reported periodic 1 for the configured
K1"reference @S1 processK in the most recent 1 reporting instance for the @S1 process otherwise the P21 and @E1 alues are calculatedconditioned on the last reported periodic 1.
• *or other transmission modes the P21 and @E1 alues are calculated
conditioned on transmission rank '.
1n the subframe where the wideband first P21 is reported for transmission modes 5 and
'6 with ? @S1"S ports configured and for transmission modes ?! 5 and '6 withalternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured#
• / set of precoding matrices corresponding to the wideband first P21 is
selected from the codebook subset assuming transmission on set * subbands.
• / -, shall report a type a report on each respectie successie reportingopportunity consisting of the wideband first P21 corresponding to the selected
• 1f a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1
processK for a @S1 process! and the most recent type 9 report for the @S1 process is dropped! and a type 9 report for the K1"reference @S1 processK with
PT1I6 is reported in the most recent 1 reporting instance for the @S1 process!the wideband first P21 alue for the @S1 process is calculated conditioned onthe reported periodic 1 for the configured K1"reference @S1 processK in the
most recent 1 reporting instance for the @S1 process otherwise with the lastreported PT1I6! the wideband first P21 alue is calculated conditioned on thelast reported periodic 1.
1n the subframe where wideband @E1Fsecond P21 is reported for transmission modes 5
and '6 with ? @S1"S ports configured and for transmission modes ?!5! and '6 withalternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured#
• / single precoding matri% is selected from the codebook subset assuming
transmission on set * subbands.
• / -, shall report a type b report on each respectie successie reporting
opportunity consisting of#
o / wideband @E1 alue which is calculated assuming the use of theselected single precoding matri% in all subbands and transmission onset * subbands.
o The wideband second P21 corresponding to the selected single
precoding matri%.
o hen 1Y'! an additional 3"bit wideband spatial differential @E1!
which is shown in Table =.".
• 1f a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1
processK for a @S1 process! and the most recent type 9 report for the @S1 process is dropped! and a type 9 report for the K1"reference @S1 processK with
PT1I' is reported in the most recent 1 reporting instance for the @S1 process!
o The wideband second P21 alue for the @S1 process is calculated
conditioned on the reported periodic 1 for the configured K1"reference @S1 processK in the most recent 1 reporting instance for the@S1 process and the last reported wideband first P21 for the @S1
process!
o The wideband @E1 alue is calculated conditioned on the selected
precoding matri% for the @S1 process and the reported periodic 1 forthe configured K1"reference @S1 processK in the most recent 1reporting instance for the @S1 process.
• Mtherwise! with the last reported PT1I'!
o The wideband second P21 alue is calculated conditioned on the last
reported periodic 1 and the wideband first P21.
o The wideband @E1 alue is calculated conditioned on the selected
precoding matri% and the last reported periodic 1.
• 1f the last reported first P21 was computed under an 1 assumption that differs
from the last reported periodic 1! or in the absence of a last reported first P21!the conditioning of the second P21 alue is not specified.
1n the subframe where @E1 for the selected subband is reported for all transmission
modes e%cept with ? @S1"S ports configured for transmission modes 5 and '6! or with
alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured for transmission modes ?!5 and '6#
• The -, shall select the preferred subband within the set of N j subbands in each
of the bandwidth parts where is gien in Table =..".
• The -, shall report a type ' report per bandwidth part on each respectie
successie reporting opportunity consisting of#
o @E1 alue for codeword 6 reflecting transmission only oer the
selected subband of a bandwidth part determined in the preious stepalong with the corresponding preferred subband L"bit label.
o hen 1Y'! an additional 3"bit subband spatial differential @E1 alue
for codeword ' offset leel
@odeword ' offset leel I subband @E1 inde% for codeword 6
; subband @E1 inde% for codeword '.
/ssuming the use of the most recently reported single
precoding matri% in all subbands and transmission on theselected subband within the applicable bandwidth part.
o
The mapping from the 3"bit subband spatial differential @E1 alue tothe offset leel is shown in Table =.".
• *or transmission modes <! ?! 5 and '6!
o 1f a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference
@S1 processK for a @S1 process! and the most recent type 3 report forthe @S1 process is dropped! and a type 3 report for the K1"reference@S1 processK is reported in the most recent 1 reporting instance forthe @S1 process! the subband selection and @E1 alues for the @S1 process are calculated conditioned on the last reported periodic
wideband P21 for the @S1 process and the reported periodic 1 forthe configured K1"reference @S1 processK in the most recent 1reporting instance for the @S1 process otherwise the subbandselection and @E1 alues are calculated conditioned on the lastreported periodic wideband P21 and 1.
• *or other transmission modes the subband selection and @E1 alues are
calculated conditioned on the last reported P21 and transmission rank '.
1n the subframe where wideband @E1Fsecond P21 is reported for transmission modes 5
and '6 with ? @S1"S ports configured and for transmission modes ?! 5 and '6 withalternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured#
• / single precoding matri% is selected from the codebook subset assuming
transmission on set * subbands.
• The -, shall report a type b report on each respectie successie reportingopportunity consisting of#
o / wideband @E1 alue which is calculated assuming the use of the
selected single precoding matri% in all subbands and transmission onset * subbands.
o The wideband second P21 corresponding to the selected single
precoding matri%.
o hen 1Y'! an additional 3"bit wideband spatial differential @E1!
which is shown in Table =.".
• 1f a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1
processK for a @S1 process! and the most recent type 9 report for the @S1 process is dropped! and a type 9 report for the K1"reference @S1 processK withPT1I6 is reported in the most recent 1 reporting instance for the @S1 process!
o The wideband second P21 alue for the @S1 process is calculated
conditioned on the reported periodic 1 for the configured K1"reference @S1 processK in the most recent 1 reporting instance for the
@S1 process and the last reported wideband first P21 for the @S1 process.
o
The wideband @E1 alue is calculated conditioned on the selected precoding matri% for the @S1 process and the reported periodic 1 for
the configured K1"reference @S1 processK in the most recent 1reporting instance for the @S1 process.
• Mtherwise! with the last reported PT1I6!
o The wideband second P21 alue is calculated conditioned on the last
reported periodic 1 and the wideband first P21. The wideband @E1alue is calculated conditioned on the selected precoding matri% andthe last reported periodic 1.
• 1f the last reported first P21 was computed under an 1 assumption that differs
from the last reported periodic 1! or in the absence of a last reported first P21!the conditioning of the second P21 alue is not specified.
1n the subframe where subband @E1Fsecond P21 for the selected subband is reported
for transmission modes 5 and '6 with ? @S1"S ports configured and for transmissionmodes ?! 5 and '6 with alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured#
• The -, shall select the preferred subband within the set of N j subbands in each
of the bandwidth parts where is gien in Table =..".
• The -, shall report a type 'a report per bandwidth part on each respectie
successie reporting opportunity consisting of#
o @E1 alue for codeword 6 reflecting transmission only oer the
selected subband of a bandwidth part determined in the preious stepalong with the corresponding preferred subband L"bit label.
o hen 1Y'! an additional 3"bit subband spatial differential @E1 alue
for codeword ' offset leel
@odeword ' offset leel I subband @E1 inde% for codeword 6
; subband @E1 inde% for codeword '.
/ssuming the use of the precoding matri% corresponding to the
selected second P21 and the most recently reported first P21and transmission on the selected subband within the applicable bandwidth part.
o The mapping from the 3"bit subband spatial differential @E1 alue tothe offset leel is shown in Table =.".
o / second P21 of the preferred precoding matri% selected from the
codebook subset assuming transmission only oer the selectedsubband within the applicable bandwidth part determined in the preious step.
• 1f a -, is configured in transmission mode '6 with a K1"reference @S1
processK for a @S1 process! and the most recent type 9 report for the @S1 process is dropped! and a type 9 report for the K1"reference @S1 processK withPT1I' is reported in the most recent 1 reporting instance for the @S1 process!
o The subband second P21 alues for the @S1 process are calculatedconditioned on the reported periodic 1 for the configured K1"reference @S1 processK in the most recent 1 reporting instance for the
1f parameter tti/undlin proided by higher layers is set to TR! and if an -:"S@D in subframe bundling operationcollides with a periodic @S1 reporting instance! then the -, shall drop the periodic @S1 report of a gien P-@@Dreporting type in that subframe and shall not multiple% the periodic @S1 report payload in the P-S@D transmission in
that subframe. / -, is not e%pected to be configured with simultaneous P-@@D and P-S@D transmission when -:"S@D subframe bundling is configured.
The @E1 indices and their interpretations are gien in Table =..3"' for reporting @E1 based on EPSC! '9E/2 and9<E/2. The @E1 indices and their interpretations are gien in Table =..3" for reporting @E1 based on EPSC!'9E/2! 9<E/2 and 79E/2.
>ased on an unrestricted obseration interal in time and fre0uency! the -, shall derie for each @E1 alue reported inuplink subframe n the highest @E1 inde% between ' and '7 in Table =..3"' or Table =..3" which satisfies thefollowing condition! or @E1 inde% 6 if @E1 inde% ' does not satisfy the condition#
" / single P+S@D transport block with a combination of modulation scheme and transport block si&ecorresponding to the @E1 inde%! and occupying a group of downlink physical resource blocks termed the @S1reference resource! could be receied with a transport block error probability not e%ceeding 6.'.
1f @S1 subframe sets @S1!6C and @S1!'C are configured by higher layers! each @S1 reference resource belongs to
either @S1!6C or @S1!'C but not to both. hen @S1 subframe sets @S1!6C and @S1!'C are configured by higher
layers a -, is not e%pected to receie a trigger for which the @S1 reference resource is in subframe that does not belongto either subframe set. *or a -, in transmission mode '6 and periodic @S1 reporting! the @S1 subframe set for the @S1
reference resource is configured by higher layers for each @S1 process.
*or a -, in transmission mode 5 when parameter pmi#R0#Report is configured by higher layers! the -, shall derie the
channel measurements for computing the @E1 alue reported in uplink subframe n based on only the @hannel"State1nformation (@S1) reference signals (@S1"S) defined in 34 for which the -, is configured to assume non"&ero powerfor the @S1"S. *or a -, in transmission mode 5 when the parameter pmi#R0#Report is not configured by higher layersor in transmission modes '"? the -, shall derie the channel measurements for computing @E1 based on @S.
*or a -, in transmission mode '6! the -, shall derie the channel measurements for computing the @E1 alue reported
in uplink subframe n and corresponding to a @S1 process! based on only the non"&ero power @S1"S (defined in 34)within a configured @S1"S resource associated with the @S1 process.
*or a -, in transmission mode '6 ! the -, shall derie the interference measurements for computing the @E1 aluereported in uplink subframe n and corresponding to a @S1 process! based on only the configured @S1"12 resource
associated with the @S1 process. 1f the -, in transmission mode '6 is configured by higher layers for @S1 subframe sets
@S1!6C and @S1!'C for the @S1 process! the configured @S1"12 resource within the subframe subset belonging to the
@S1 reference resource is used to derie the interference measurement. *or a -, configured with the parameter 0)TA#
)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for a sering cell! configured @S1"12 resource(s) within only downlink subframe(s) of a radioframe that are indicated by -:F+: configuration of the sering cell can be used to derie the interference measurementfor the sering cell.
/ combination of modulation scheme and transport block si&e corresponds to a @E1 inde% if#
" the combination could be signalled for transmission on the P+S@D in the @S1 reference resource according tothe releant Transport >lock Si&e table! and
" the modulation scheme is indicated by the @E1 inde%! and
" the combination of transport block si&e and modulation scheme when applied to the reference resource results inthe effectie channel code rate which is the closest possible to the code rate indicated by the @E1 inde%. 1f more
than one combination of transport block si&e and modulation scheme results in an effectie channel code ratee0ually close to the code rate indicated by the @E1 inde%! only the combination with the smallest of suchtransport block si&es is releant.
The @S1 reference resource for a sering cell is defined as follows#
" 1n the fre0uency domain! the @S1 reference resource is defined by the group of downlink physical resource blocks corresponding to the band to which the deried @E1 alue relates.
" 1n the time domain!
" for a -, configured in transmission mode '"5 or transmission mode '6 with a single configured @S1 processfor the sering cell! the @S1 reference resource is defined by a single downlink or special subframe n"nC50<ref !
" where for periodic @S1 reporting nC50<ref is the smallest alue greater than or e0ual to <! such that itcorresponds to a alid downlink or alid special subframe!
" where for aperiodic @S1 reporting! if the -, is not configured with the higher layer parameter csi#
*uframeatternConfi#r$%,.
# nC50<ref is such that the reference resource is in the same alid downlink or alid special subframe asthe corresponding @S1 re0uest in an uplink +@1 format.
" nC50<ref is e0ual to < and subframe n"nC50<ref corresponds to a alid downlink or alid special subframe!where subframe n"nC50<ref is receied after the subframe with the corresponding @S1 re0uest in aandom /ccess esponse Grant.
" where for aperiodic @S1 reporting! and the -, configured with the higher layer parameter csi#
*uframeatternConfi#r$%!
" for the -, configured in transmission mode '"5!
# nC50<ref is the smallest alue greater than or e0ual to < and subframe n"nC50<ref corresponds to aalid downlink or alid special subframe! where subframe n"nC50<ref is receied on or after the
subframe with the corresponding @S1 re0uest in an uplink +@1 format# nC50<ref is the smallest alue greater than or e0ual to <! and subframe n"nC50<ref corresponds to a
alid downlink or alid special subframe! where subframe n"nC50<ref is receied after the subframewith the corresponding @S1 re0uest in an andom /ccess esponse Grant
" if there is no alid alue for nC50<ref based on the aboe conditions! then nC50<ref is the smallestalue such that the reference resource is in a alid downlink or alid special subframe n"nC50<ref prior to the subframe with the corresponding @S1 re0uest! where subframe n"nC50<ref is the lowest
indexed valid downlink or alid special subframe within a radio frame
" for the -, configured in transmission mode '6!
# nC50<ref is the smallest alue greater than or e0ual to <! such that it corresponds to a alid downlink
or alid special subframe! and the corresponding @S1 re0uest is in an uplink +@1 format
# nC50<ref is the smallest alue greater than or e0ual to <! and subframe n"nC50<ref corresponds to aalid downlink or alid special subframe! where subframe n"nC50<ref is receied after the subframewith the corresponding @S1 re0uest in a andom /ccess esponse Grant
" for a -, configured in transmission mode '6 with multiple configured @S1 processes for the sering cell! the
@S1 reference resource for a gien @S1 process is defined by a single downlink or special subframe n"nC50<ref !
" where for *++ sering cell and periodic or aperiodic @S1 reporting nC50<ref is the smallest alue greaterthan or e0ual to 7! such that it corresponds to a alid downlink or alid special subframe! and foraperiodic @S1 reporting the corresponding @S1 re0uest is in an uplink +@1 format
" where for *++ sering cell and aperiodic @S1 reporting nC50<ref is e0ual to 7 and subframe n"nC50<ref
corresponds to a alid downlink or alid special subframe! where subframe n"nC50<ref is receied after thesubframe with the corresponding @S1 re0uest in a andom /ccess esponse Grant.
" where for T++ sering cell! and or 3 configured @S1 processes! and periodic or aperiodic @S1
reporting! nC50<ref is the smallest alue greater than or e0ual to <! such that it corresponds to a aliddownlink or alid special subframe! and for aperiodic @S1 reporting the corresponding @S1 re0uest is inan uplink +@1 format
" where for T++ sering cell! and or 3 configured @S1 processes! and aperiodic @S1 reporting! nC50<ref ise0ual to < and subframe n"nC50<ref corresponds to a alid downlink or alid special subframe! where
subframe n"nC50<ref is receied after the subframe with the corresponding @S1 re0uest in a andom /ccessesponse Grant
" where for T++ sering cell! and < configured @S1 processes! and periodic or aperiodic @S1 reporting!nC50<ref is the smallest alue greater than or e0ual to 7! such that it corresponds to a alid downlink or
alid special subframe! and for aperiodic @S1 reporting the corresponding @S1 re0uest is in an uplink +@1format
" where for T++ sering cell! and < configured @S1 processes! and aperiodic @S1 reporting! nC50<ref is e0ualto 7 and subframe n"nC50<ref corresponds to a alid downlink or alid special subframe! where subframe n"nC50<ref is receied after the subframe with the corresponding @S1 re0uest in a andom /ccess esponseGrant.
/ subframe in a sering cell shall be considered to be a alid downlink or a alid special subframe if#
" it is configured as a downlink subframe or a special subframe for that -,! and
" in case multiple cells with different uplink"downlink configurations are aggregated and the -, is notcapable of simultaneous reception and transmission in the aggregated cells! the subframe in the primary
cell is a downlink subframe or a special subframe with the length of +wPTS more than s=9?6 T ⋅ ! and
" e%cept for transmission mode 5 or '6! it is not an 2>S*B subframe! and
" it does not contain a +wPTS field in case the length of +wPTS is s=9?6 T ⋅ and less! and
" it does not fall within a configured measurement gap for that -,! and
" for periodic @S1 reporting! it is an element of the @S1 subframe set linked to the periodic @S1 report when
that -, is configured with @S1 subframe sets! and
" for a -, configured in transmission mode '6 with multiple configured @S1 processes! and aperiodic @S1reporting for a @S1 process! it is an element of the @S1 subframe set linked to the downlink or specialsubframe with the corresponding @S1 re0uest in an uplink +@1 format! when that -, is configured with@S1 subframe sets for the @S1 process and -, is not configured with the higher layer parameter csi#
*uframeatternConfi#r$%! and
" for a -, configured in transmission mode '"5! and aperiodic @S1 reporting! it is an element of the @S1subframe set associated with the corresponding @S1 re0uest in an uplink +@1 format! when that -, isconfigured with @S1 subframe sets by the higher layer parameter csi#*uframeatternConfi#r$%! and
" for a -, configured in transmission mode '6! and aperiodic @S1 reporting for a @S1 process! it is anelement of the @S1 subframe set associated with the corresponding @S1 re0uest in an uplink +@1 format!
when that -, is configured with @S1 subframe sets by the higher layer parameter csi#
*uframeatternConfi#r$% for the @S1 process.
1f there is no alid downlink or no alid special subframe for the @S1 reference resource in a sering cell! @S1reporting is omitted for the sering cell in uplink subframe n.
1n the layer domain! the @S1 reference resource is defined by any 1 and P21 on which the @E1 is conditioned.
1n the @S1 reference resource! the -, shall assume the following for the purpose of deriing the @E1 inde%! and if alsoconfigured! P21 and 1#
" The first 3 M*+2 symbols are occupied by control signalling
" Bo resource elements used by primary or secondary synchroni&ation signals or P>@D or ,P+@@D
" @P length of the non"2>S*B subframes
" edundancy $ersion 6
" 1f @S1"S is used for channel measurements! the ratio of P+S@D ,P, to @S1"S ,P, is as gien insubclause =..7
" *or transmission mode 5 @S1 reporting#
" @S ,s are as in non"2>S*B subframes
" 1f the -, is configured for P21F1 reporting! the -,"specific reference signal oerhead is consistent with the
most recent reported rank if more than one @S1"S port is configured! and is consistent with rank '
transmission if only one @S1"S port is configured and P+S@D signals on antenna ports U9= υ +
for υ layers would result in signals e0uialent to corresponding symbols transmitted on antenna ports
[ ]T i &i &i & )(...)()( )'()6( −= υ is a ector of symbols from the layer mapping in subclause 9.3.3. of
34! U?!<!!'∈ is the number of @S1"S ports configured! and if only one @S1"S port is configured!
)(i is '! otherwise )(i is the precoding matri% corresponding to the reported P21 applicable to
)(i & . The corresponding P+S@D signals transmitted on antenna ports U'<'7 + would hae a ratio
of ,P, to @S1"S ,P, e0ual to the ratio gien in subclause =..7.
" *or transmission mode '6 @S1 reporting! if a @S1 process is configured without P21F1 reporting#
" 1f the number of antenna ports of the associated @S1"S resource is one! a P+S@D transmission is on single"antenna port! port =. The channel on antenna port =U is inferred from the channel on antenna port '7U of
the associated @S1"S resource.
" @S ,s are as in non"2>S*B subframes. The @S oerhead is assumed to be the same as the @Soerhead corresponding to the number of @S antenna ports of the sering cell
" The -,"specific reference signal oerhead is ' ,s per P> pair.
" Mtherwise!
" 1f the number of antenna ports of the associated @S1"S resource is ! the P+S@D transmission schemeassumes the transmit diersity scheme defined in subclause =.'. on antenna ports 6!'U e%cept that the
channels on antenna ports 6!'U are inferred from the channels on antenna port '7! '9U of the associated@S1 resource respectiely.
" 1f the number of antenna ports of the associated @S1"S resource is <! the P+S@D transmission schemeassumes the transmit diersity scheme defined in subclause =.'. on antenna ports 6!'!!3U e%cept that
the channels on antenna ports 6!'!!3U are inferred from the channels on antenna ports '7! '9! '=! '?U
of the associated @S1"S resource respectiely.
" The -, is not e%pected to be configured with more than < antenna ports for the @S1"S resourceassociated with the @S1 process configured without P21F1 reporting.
" The oerhead of @S ,s is assuming the same number of antenna ports as that of the associated @S1"Sresource.
" -,"specific reference signal oerhead is &ero.
" *or transmission mode '6 @S1 reporting! if a @S1 process is configured with P21F1 reporting#
" @S ,s are as in non"2>S*B subframes. The @S oerhead is assumed to be the same as the @Soerhead corresponding to the number of @S antenna ports of the sering cell
" The -,"specific reference signal oerhead is consistent with the most recent reported rank for the @S1 process if more than one @S1"S port is configured! and is consistent with rank ' transmission if only one
@S1"S port is configured and P+S@D signals on antenna ports U9= υ + for υ layers would result in
signals e0uialent to corresponding symbols transmitted on antenna ports U'<'7 + ! as gien by
=
−+)(
)(
)(
)(
)(
)'(
)6(
)'<(
)'7(
i &
i &
i
i =
i =
υ
! where [ ]T i &i &i & )(...)()( )'()6( −= υ is a ector of symbols
from the layer mapping in subclause 9.3.3. of 34! U?!<!!'∈ is the number of antenna ports of the
associated @S1"S resource! and if I'! )(i is '! otherwise )(i is the precoding matri%
corresponding to the reported P21 applicable to )(i & . The corresponding P+S@D signals transmitted on
antenna ports U'<'7 + would hae a ratio of ,P, to @S1"S ,P, e0ual to the ratio gien in
" /ssume no ,s allocated for @S1"S and &ero"power @S1"S
" /ssume no ,s allocated for PS
" The P+S@D transmission scheme gien by Table =..3"6 depending on the transmission mode currentlyconfigured for the -, (which may be the default mode).
" 1f @S is used for channel measurements! the ratio of P+S@D ,P, to cell"specific S ,P, is as gien insubclause 7. with the e%ception of A ρ which shall be assumed to be
- )(log'6 '6+∆+= offset A A ρ d>4 for any modulation scheme! if the -, is configured with
transmission mode with < cell"specific antenna ports! or transmission mode 3 with < cell"specificantenna ports and the associated 1 is e0ual to one
- offset A A ∆+= ρ d>4 for any modulation scheme and any number of layers! otherwise.
The shift offset ∆ is gien by the parameter nomD*C-#R*#R#4ffset which is configured by higher"layer
signalling.
Table 7.2.3-0: PDS< %ra!s*"ss"o! se*e ass$*e for S/ refere!e reso$re
Tra!s*"ss"o!*oe
Tra!s*"ss"o! se*e of PDS<
1 Sin"le%antenna port6 port -
2 !ransmit diversity
3 !ransmit diversity if the associated ran# indicator is 16 otherwise lar"e delay ((
4 losed%loop spatial multiple=in"
) ulti%user $5
losed%loop spatial multiple=in" with a sin"le transmission layer
/ $f the number of *8; antenna ports is one6 Sin"le%antenna port6 port -L otherwise !ransmit diversity
$f the +, is confi"ured without *$'R$ reportin"> if the number of *8; antenna ports is one6 sin"le%
antenna port6 port -L otherwise transmit diversity
$f the +, is confi"ured with *$'R$ reportin"> closed%loop spatial multiple=in"
$f the +, is confi"ured without *$'R$ reportin"> if the number of *8; antenna ports is one6 sin"le%antenna port6 port -L otherwise transmit diversity
$f the +, is confi"ured with *$'R$ reportin"> if the number of S$%RS ports is one6 sin"le%antenna port6port /L otherwise up to layer transmission6 ports /%14 0see subclause /.1.)8
1-
$f a S$ process of the +, is confi"ured without *$'R$ reportin"> if the number of S$%RS ports is one6sin"le%antenna port6 port/L otherwise transmit diversity
$f a S$ process of the +, is confi"ured with *$'R$ reportin"> if the number of S$%RS ports is one6sin"le%antenna port6 port /L otherwise up to layer transmission6 ports /%14 0see subclause /.1.)8
*or transmission modes <! 7 and 9! precoding feedback is used for channel dependent codebook based precoding andrelies on -,s reporting precoding matri% indicator (P21). *or transmission mode ?! the -, shall report P21 ifconfigured with P21F1 reporting. *or transmission modes 5 and '6! the -, shall report P21 if configured withP21F1 reporting and the number of @S1"S ports is larger than '. / -, shall report P21 based on the feedback modesdescribed in =..' and =... *or other transmission modes! P21 reporting is not supported.
*or antenna ports! each P21 alue corresponds to a codebook inde% gien in Table 9.3.<..3"' of 34 as follows#
*or antenna ports { }'!6 or '7!'9U and an associated 1 alue of '! a P21 alue of { }3!!'!6∈n
corresponds to the codebook inde% n gien in Table 9.3.<..3"' of 34 with '=υ .
*or antenna ports { }'!6 or '7!'9U and an associated 1 alue of ! a P21 alue of { }'!6∈n corresponds
to the codebook inde% '+n gien in Table 9.3.<..3"' of 34 with =υ .
*or < antenna ports { }3!!'!6 or '7!'9!'=!'?U! each P21 alue corresponds to a codebook inde% gien in Table
9.3.<..3" of 34 or a pair of codebook indices gien in Table =..<"6/! =..<"6>! =..<"6@! or =..<"6+ as follows#
• / P21 alue of { }'7!!'!6 ∈n corresponds to the codebook inde% n gien in Table 9.3.<..3" of 34
with υ e0ual to the associated 1 alue e%cept with alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! configured.
• 1f alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$%1TR! is configured! each P21 alue corresponds to a pair of
codebook indices gien in Table =..<"6/! =..<"6>! =..<"6@! or =..<"6+! where the 0uantities nϕ ! nKϕ
and mvK in Table =..<"6/ and Table =..<"6> are gien by
[ ]T3
3
'K
K
m (
m
n (
n
n (
n
ev
e
e
π
π
π
ϕ
ϕ
=
=
=
o / first P21 alue of { }')(!!'!6' −∈ υ f i and a second P21 alue of
{ }')(!!'!6 −∈ υ . i
correspond to the codebook indices 'i and i respectiely gien inTable =..<"6 ( with υ e0ual to the associated 1 alue and where ( I/!>!@!+U respectiely when
{ }<!3!!'=υ ! { }'!'!'9!'9)( =υ f and { }'9!'9!'9!'9)( =υ . .
o The 0uantity U sn in Table =..<"6@ and Table =..<"6+ denotes the matri% defined by the columns
gien by the set U s from the e%pression n - n
- nnn uuuu 0 −= where 0 is the <<×
identity matri% and the ector nu is gien by Table 9.3.<..3" in 34 and in = .
o 1n some cases codebook subsampling is supported. The sub"sampled codebook for P-@@D mode '"'
submode is defined in Table =.."'G for first and second precoding matri% indicators 'i and i .
[oint encoding of rank and first precoding matri% indicator 'i for P-@@D mode '"' submode ' is
defined in Table =.."'D. The sub"sampled codebook for P-@@D mode "' is defined in Table
=.."'1 for P-@@D eporting Type 'a.
Table 7.2.4-0: oebooA for 1-laer S/ re,or%"!# $s"!# a!%e!!a ,or%s 0 %o 3 or 15 %o 18
The -, is not e%pected to receie the configuration of alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$% e%cept fortransmission mode ? configured with < @S ports! and transmission modes 5 and '6 configured with < @S1"S ports.*or a -, configured in transmission mode '6! the parameter alternativeCode/oo"naled3or@T7#r$% may beconfigured for each @S1 process.
*or ? antenna ports! each P21 alue corresponds to a pair of codebook indices gien in Table =..<"'! =..<"! =..<"3!
=..<"<! =..<"7! =..<"9! =..<"=! or =..<"?! where the 0uantities nϕ and mv are gien by
[ ]T393<3
' m (m (m (
m
n (n
eeev
e
π π π
π ϕ
=
=
as follows#*or ? antenna ports { }!'!6!'5!'?!'=!'9!'7 ! a first P21 alue of { }')(!!'!6' −∈ υ f i and a
second P21 alue of { }')(!!'!6
−∈ υ . i corresponds to the codebook indices 'i and i gien in Table
*or a sering cell and -, configured in transmission mode 5! the -, can be configured with one @S1"S resourceconfiguration. *or a sering cell and -, configured in transmission mode '6! the -, can be configured with one ormore @S1"S resource configuration(s). The following parameters for which the -, shall assume non"&ero transmission power for @S1"S are configured ia higher layer signaling for each @S1"S resource configuration#
" @S1"S resource configuration identity! if the -, is configured in transmission mode '6!
" Bumber of @S1"S ports. The allowable alues and port mapping are gien in subclause 9.'6.7 of 34.
" @S1 S @onfiguration (see Table 9.'6.7."' and Table 9.'6.7." in 34)
" @S1 S subframe configuration S@S1− 0 . The allowable alues are gien in subclause 9.'6.7.3 of 34.
" -, assumption on reference P+S@D transmitted power for @S1 feedback c ! if the -, is configured in
transmission mode 5.
" -, assumption on reference P+S@D transmitted power for @S1 feedback c for each @S1 process! if the -, is
configured in transmission mode '6. 1f @S1 subframe sets @S1!6C
and @S1!'C
are configured by higher layers for a @S1 process! c is configured for each @S1 subframe set of the @S1 process.
" Pseudo"random se0uence generator parameter! 1+n . The allowable alues are gien in ''4.
" Digher layer parameter cl#CR*#0nfo#r$$ for Euasi co"location type > -, assumption of @S antenna ports and@S1"S antenna ports with the following parameters! if the -, is configured in transmission mode '6#
# cl#*cramlin0dentit=#r$$.
# crs#ortsCount#r$$.
# msfn#*uframeConfiList#r$$.
c is the assumed ratio of P+S@D ,P, to @S1"S ,P, when -, deries @S1 feedback and takes alues in the
range of "?! '74 d> with ' d> step si&e! where the P+S@D ,P, corresponds to the symbols for which the ratio of the
P+S@D ,P, to the cell"specific S ,P, is denoted by A ρ ! as specified in Table 7." and Table 7."3.
/ -, should not e%pect the configuration of @S1"S and P2@D in the same subframe of a sering cell.
*or frame structure type sering cell and < @S ports! the -, is not e%pected to receie a @S1 S @onfiguration inde%(see Table 9.'6.7."' and Table 9.'6.7." in 34) belonging to the set 6"3'4 for the normal @P case or the set '9"=4
for the e%tended @P case.
/ -, may assume the @S1"S antenna ports of a @S1"S resource configuration are 0uasi co"located (as defined in 34)with respect to delay spread! +oppler spread! +oppler shift! aerage gain! and aerage delay.
/ -, configured in transmission mode '6 and with 0uasi co"location type >! may assume the antenna ports 6 ; 3associated with cl#CR*#0nfo#r$$ corresponding to a @S1"S resource configuration and antenna ports '7 ; corresponding to the @S1"S resource configuration are 0uasi co"located (as defined in 34) with respect to +opplershift! and +oppler spread.
*or a sering cell and -, configured in transmission mode '6! the -, can be configured with one or more @S1"12resource configuration(s). The following parameters are configured ia higher layer signaling for each @S1"12 resource
configuration#
" \ero"power @S1 S @onfiguration (see Table 9.'6.7."' and Table 9.'6.7." in 34)
" \ero"power @S1 S subframe configuration S@S1− 0 . The allowable alues are gien in subclause 9.'6.7.3 of
34.
*or a sering cell! if a -, is not configured with the higher layer parameter csi#*uframeatternConfi#r$%! the -, isnot e%pected to receie @S1"12 resource configuration(s) that are not all completely oerlapping with one &ero"power@S1"S resource configuration which can be configured for the -,.
/ -, is not e%pected to receie a @S1"12 resource configuration that is not completely oerlapping with one of the
&ero"power @S1"S resource configurations defined in subclause =..=.
*or a sering cell! if a -, is not configured with @S1 subframe sets @S1!6C and @S1!'C for any @S1 process! and the UE
is configured with four CSI-IM resources! then the -, is not e%pected to be configured with @S1 processes that are
associated with all of the four @S1"12 resources.
/ -, should not e%pect the configuration of @S1"12 resource and P2@D in the same subframe of a sering cell.
/.2./ Nero *ower S$%RS Resource definition
*or a sering cell and -, configured in transmission mode '"5 and -, not configured with csi#
*uframeatternConfi#r$% for the sering cell! the -, can be configured with one &ero"power @S1"S resource
configuration. *or a sering cell and -, configured in transmission mode '"5 and -, configured with csi#
*uframeatternConfi#r$% for the sering cell! the -, can be configured with up to two &ero"power @S1"S resource
configurations. *or a sering cell and -, configured in transmission mode '6! the -, can be configured with one ormore &ero"power @S1"S resource configuration(s).
*or a sering cell! the -, can be configured with up to 7 additional &ero"power @S1"S resource configurations
according to the higher layer parameter ds#?eroT&owerC*0#R*#r$%.
The following parameters are configured ia higher layer signaling for each &ero"power @S1"S resource configuration#
" \ero"power @S1 S @onfiguration list ('9"bit bitmap ?eroowerC*0#R* in 34)
" \ero"power @S1 S subframe configuration S@S1− 0 . T he allowable alues are gien in subclause 9.'6.7.3 of 34.
/ -, should not e%pect the configuration of &ero"power @S1"S and P2@D in the same subframe of a sering cell.
*or frame structure type ' sering cell! the -, is not e%pected to receie the '9"bit bitmap ?eroowerC*0#R* with anyone of the 9 :S> bits set to ' for the normal @P case! or with any one of the ? :S> bits set to ' for the e%tended @Pcase.
*or frame structure type sering cell and < @S ports! the -, is not e%pected to receie the '9"bit bitmap ?eroowerC*0#R* with any one of the 9 :S> bits set to ' for the normal @P case! or with any one of the ? :S> bits setto ' for the e%tended @P case.
/.3 +, procedure for reportin" ;ARK%AM
1f each of the sering cell(s) configured for the -, has frame structure type '! the -, procedure for D/E"/@Creporting for frame structure type ' is gien in subclause =.3.'.
1f each of the sering cell(s) configured for the -, has frame structure type ! the -, procedure for D/E"/@Creporting for frame structure type is gien in subclause =.3..
1f the -, is configured with more than one sering cell! and if the frame structure type of any two configured seringcells is different! and if the primary cell is frame structure type '! -, procedure for D/E"/@C reporting is gien insubclause =.3.3.
1f the -, is configured for more than one sering cell! and if the frame structure type of any two configured seringcells is different! and if the primary cell is frame structure type ! -, procedure for D/E"/@C reporting is gien in
subclause =.3.<.
/.3.1 F(( ;ARK%AM reportin" procedure
*or *++ with P-@@D format 'aF'b transmission! when both D/E"/@C and S are transmitted in the same sub"frame! a -, shall transmit the D/E"/@C on its assigned D/E"/@C P-@@D format 'aF'b resource for a negatieS transmission and transmit the D/E"/@C on its assigned S P-@@D resource for a positie S transmission.
*or *++ with P-@@D format 'b with channel selection! when both D/E"/@C and S are transmitted in the same
sub"frame a -, shall transmit the D/E"/@C on its assigned D/E"/@C P-@@D resource with channel selection asdefined in subclause '6.'...' for a negatie S transmission and transmit one D/E"/@C bit per sering cell on itsassigned S P-@@D resource for a positie S transmission according to the following#
− if only one transport block or a P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release is detected on a sering
cell! the D/E"/@C bit for the sering cell is the D/E"/@C bit corresponding to the transport block or theP+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release
− if two transport blocks are receied on a sering cell! the D/E"/@C bit for the sering cell is generated by
spatially bundling the D/E"/@C bits corresponding to the transport blocks
− if neither P+S@D transmission for which D/E"/@C response shall be proided nor P+@@DF,P+@@D
indicating downlink SPS release is detected for a sering cell! the D/E"/@C bit for the sering cell is set to
B/@C
and the D/E"/@C bits for the primary cell and the secondary cell are mapped to )6(+ and )'(+ ! respectiely! where)6(+ and )'(+ are specified in subclause 7.<.' in 34.
*or *++! when a P-@@D format 3 transmission of D/E"/@C coincides with a sub"frame configured to the -, byhigher layers for transmission of a scheduling re0uest! the -, shall multiple% D/E"/@C and S bits on D/E"/@C P-@@D resource as defined in subclause 7..3.' in <4! unless the D/E"/@C corresponds to a P+S@D transmissionon the primary cell only or a P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release on the primary cell only! in whichcase the S shall be transmitted as for *++ with P-@@D format 'aF'b.
*or *++ and for a P-S@D transmission! a -, shall not transmit D/E"/@C on P-S@D in subframe n if the -, doesnot receie P+S@D or P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in subframe n#@.
hen only a positie S is transmitted! a -, shall use P-@@D *ormat ' for the S resource as defined in subclause7.<.' in 34.
/.3.2 !(( ;ARK%AM reportin" procedure
*or T++ and a -, not configured with the parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for any sering cell! if the -, isconfigured with one sering cell! or if the -, is configured with more than one sering cell and the T++ -:F+:configuration of all the configured sering cells is the same! -, procedure for reporting D/E"/@C is gien insubclause =.3..'.
*or T++! if a -, is configured with more than one sering cell and the T++ -:F+: configuration of at least twoconfigured sering cells is not the same! or if the -, is configured with the parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$%
for at least one sering cell! -, procedure for reporting D/E"/@C is gien in subclause =.3...
hen only a positie S is transmitted! a -, shall use P-@@D *ormat ' for the S resource as defined in subclause7.<.' in 34.
/.3.2.1 !(( ;ARK%AM reportin" procedure for same +<'(< confi"uration
*or T++! the -, shall upon detection of a P+S@D transmission or a P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS
release (defined in subclause 5.) within subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ and 2 is defined in Table '6.'.3.'"'
intended for the -, and for which D/E"/@C response shall be proided! transmit the D/E"/@C response in -:subframe n.
*or T++! when P-@@D format 3 is configured for transmission of D/E"/@C! for special subframe configurations 6and 7 with normal downlink @P or configurations 6 and < with e%tended downlink @P in a sering cell! shown in table<."' 34! the special subframe of the sering cell is e%cluded from the D/E"/@C codebook si&e determination. 1n
this case! if the sering cell is the primary cell! there is no P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in thespecial subframe.
*or T++ -:F+: configurations '"9 and one configured sering cell! if the -, is not configured with P-@@D format 3!
the alue of the +ownlink /ssignment 1nde% (+/1) in +@1 format 6F<!!L
DA0 > ! detected by the -, according to Table
=.3"A in subframe K" n − ! where K" is defined in Table =.3"W! represents the total number of subframes with P+S@D
transmissions and with P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release to the corresponding -, within all the
subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ . The alue!L
DA0 > includes all P+S@D transmission with and without corresponding
P+@@DF,P+@@D within all the subframe(s) " n− . 1n case neither P+S@D transmission! nor P+@@DF,P+@@D
indicating the downlink SPS resource release is intended to the -,! the -, can e%pect that the alue of the +/1 in +@1
format 6F<!!L
DA0 > ! if transmitted! is set to <.
*or T++ -:F+: configuration '"9 and a -, configured with more than one sering cell! or for T++ -:F+:
configuration '"9 and a -, configured with one sering cell and P-@@D format 3! a alue!L
DA0 is determined by the
+ownlink /ssignment 1nde% (+/1) in +@1 format 6F< according to Table =.3"\ in subframe K" n − ! where K" isdefined in Table =.3"W. 1n case neither P+S@D transmission! nor P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating the downlink SPS
resource release is intended to the -,! the -, can e%pect that the alue of!L
DA0 is set to < by the +/1 in +@1 format
6F< if transmitted.
*or T++ -:F+: configurations '"9! the alue of the +/1 in +@1 format 'F'/F'>F'+FF/F>F@F+ denotes theaccumulatie number of P+@@DF,P+@@D (s) with assigned P+S@D transmission(s) and P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating
downlink SPS release up to the present subframe within subframe(s) " n− of each configured sering cell! where
2 " ∈ ! and shall be updated from subframe to subframe. +enote DL
c DA0 > ! as the alue of the +/1 in P+@@DF,P+@@D
with +@1 format 'F'/F'>F'+FF/F>F@F+ detected by the -, according to Table =.3"A in subframe m" n − in
sering cell c ! where m" is the smallest alue in the set 2 (defined in Table '6.'.3.'"') such that the -, detects a
+@1 format 'F'/F'>F'+FF/F>F@F+. hen configured with one sering cell! the subscript of c in DLc DA0 > ! can be
omitted.
*or all T++ -:F+: configurations! denote c DA0 ! ! as the total number of P+@@DF,P+@@D (s) with assigned P+S@D
transmission(s) and P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release detected by the -, within the subframe(s)
" n − in sering cell c ! where 2 " ∈ . hen configured with one sering cell! the subscript of c in c DA0 ! ! can be
omitted. +enote ** N ! which can be &ero or one! as the number of P+S@D transmissions without a corresponding
P+@@DF,P+@@D within the subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ .
*or T++ D/E"/@C bundling or D/E"/@C multiple%ing and a subframe n with '= ) ! the -, shall generate one
or two D/E"/@C bits by performing a logical /B+ operation per codeword across ) downlink and special
subframes associated with a single -: subframe! of all the corresponding ** DA0 N ! + indiidual P+S@D
transmission D/E"/@Cs and indiidual /@C in response to receied P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPSrelease! where ) is the number of elements in the set 2 defined in Table '6.'.3.'"'. The -, shall detect if at least
one downlink assignment has been missed! and for the case that the -, is transmitting on P-S@D the -, shall also
determine the parameter bundled N .
" *or T++ -:F+: configuration 6! bundled N shall be ' if the -, detects the P+S@D transmission with or
without corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D! or detects P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release within the
subframe " n − ! where 2 " ∈ . The -, shall not transmit D/E"/@C on P-S@D if the -, does not receie
P+S@D or P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release within the subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ .
" *or the case that the -, is not transmitting on P-S@D in subframe n and T++ -:F+: configurations '"9! if
6> DA0 ! and ( ) '<mod' +−≠ DA0
DL
DA0 ! > ! the -, detects that at least one downlink assignment has been
missed.
" *or the case that the -, is transmitting on P-S@D and the P-S@D transmission is adjusted based on a detectedP+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< intended for the -, and T++ -:F+: configurations '"9! if
( ) '<mod' +−+≠ ** DA0 !L DA0 N ! > the -, detects that at least one downlink assignment has been missed
and the -, shall generate B/@C for all codewords where bundled N is determined by the -, as
bundled += !L
DA0 > N . 1f the -, does not detect any downlink assignment missing! bundled N is determined by
the -, as!L
DA0 > N = bundled . -, shall not transmit D/E"/@C if 6=+ ** DA0 N ! and <=!L
DA0 > .
" *or the case that the -, is transmitting on P-S@D! and the P-S@D transmission is not based on a detectedP+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< intended for the -, and T++ -:F+: configurations '"9! if
6> DA0 ! and ( ) '<mod' +−≠ DA0
DL
DA0 ! > ! the -, detects that at least one downlink assignment has been
missed and the -, shall generate B/@C for all codewords. The -, determines )( bundled ** DA0 N ! N += as
the number of assigned subframes. The -, shall not transmit D/E"/@C if 6=+ ** DA0 N ! .
*or T++! when P-@@D format 3 is configured for transmission of D/E"/@C! the D/E"/@C feedback bits AC2
4c
AC2 c
AC2 c AC2
c
ooo'!
'!6! !...!− for the c"th sering cell configured by @ are constructed as follows! where cH6!
DL
c
AC2
c /4 = if transmission mode configured in the c"th sering cell supports one transport block or spatial D/E"
/@C bundling is applied and DL
c
AC2
c /4 = otherwise! where DL
c / is the number of downlink and special subframes
for which the -, needs to feedback D/E"/@C bits for the c"th sering cell.
" *or the case that the -, is transmitting on P-@@D! ) / DLc = where ) is the number of elements in the set
2 defined in Table '6.'.3.'"' associated with subframe n and the set 2 does not include a special subframe ofconfigurations 6 and 7 with normal downlink @P or of configurations 6 and < with e%tended downlink @P
otherwise '−= ) / DLc .
" *or T++ -:F+: configuration 6 or for a P-S@D transmission not adjusted based on a detected
P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F<! the -, shall assume ) / DL
c = where ) is the number of elements in
the set 2 defined in Table '6.'.3.'"' associated with subframe n and the set 2 does not include a specialsubframe of configurations 6 and 7 with normal downlink @P or of configurations 6 and < with e%tended
downlink @P otherwise '−= ) / DLc . The -, shall not transmit D/E"/@C on P-S@D if the -, does not
receie P+S@D or P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in subframe(s) " n− ! where 2 " ∈ .
" *or T++ -:F+: configurations '! ! 3! <! 9U and a P-S@D transmission adjusted based on a detected
P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F<! the -, shall assume !L DA0
DLc / = . The -, shall not transmit D/E"
/@C on P-S@D if the -, does not receie P+S@D or P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in
subframe(s) " n− where 2 " ∈ and <=!L
DA0 .
" *or T++ -:F+: configurations 7 and a P-S@D transmission adjusted based on a detected P+@@DF,P+@@D
with +@1 format 6F<! the -, shall assume ( )< F < DL !L !L
c DA0 DA0 / ! = + − ! where ! denotes the ma%imum
alue of c! among all the configured sering cells! c! is the total number of receied P+S@Ds and
P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in subframe(s) " n − on the c"th sering cell! 2 " ∈ . The -,
shall not transmit D/E"/@C on P-S@D if the -, does not receie P+S@D or P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating
downlink SPS release in subframe(s) " n − where 2 " ∈ and <=!L
DA0 .
*or T++! when P-@@D format 3 is configured for transmission of D/E"/@C!
" for T++ -:F+: configurations '"9! the D/E"/@C for a P+S@D transmission with a corresponding
P+@@DF,P+@@D or for a P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in subframe " n − is associated
with AC2
" DA0 co ')(! − if transmission mode configured in the c"th sering cell supports one transport block or spatial
D/E"/@C bundling is applied! or associated with AC2
" DA0 co )(! − and AC2
" DA0 co ')(! − otherwise! where DA0"E is
the alue of +/1 in +@1 format '/F'>F'+F'FF/F>F@F+ detected in subframe " n − !
AC2
" DA0 co )(! − and AC2
" DA0 co ')(! − are the D/E"/@C feedback for codeword 6 and codeword '! respectiely. *or the case with
6>** N ! the D/E"/@C associated with a P+S@D transmission without a corresponding
P+@@DF,P+@@D is mapped to AC2
4c AC2 c
o'! − The D/E"/@C feedback bits without any detected P+S@D
transmission or without detected P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release are set to B/@C
" for T++ -:F+: configuration 6! the D/E"/@C for a P+S@D transmission or for a P+@@DF,P+@@D
indicating downlink SPS release in subframe " n − is associated with !6
AC2
co if transmission mode configured in
the c"th sering cell supports one transport block or associated with !6
AC2
co and !'
AC2
co otherwise! where !6
AC2
co
and !'
AC2
co are the D/E"/@C feedback for codeword 6 and codeword '! respectiely. The D/E"/@Cfeedback bits without any detected P+S@D transmission or without detected P+@@DF,P+@@D indicatingdownlink SPS release are set to B/@C.
*or T++ when format 'b with channel selection is configured for transmission of D/E"/@C and for configured
sering cells! the D/E"/@C feedback bits AC2
4
AC2 AC2 AC2 ooo
''6 !...!
− on P-S@D are constructed as follows.
" *or T++ -:F+: configuration 6! AC2
(o I D/E"/@C( ()! '6 −≤≤ A ( as defined in subclause '6.'.3..'. The
-, shall not transmit D/E"/@C on P-S@D if the -, does not receie P+S@D or P+@@DF,P+@@D
indicating downlink SPS release in subframe(s) " n − where 2 " ∈ .
" *or T++ -:F+: configurations '! ! 3! <! 9U and a P-S@D transmission adjusted based on a detectedP+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< with
!L
DA0 I' or ! AC2
(o is determined as if P-@@D format 3 is
configured for transmission of D/E"/@C! e%cept that spatial D/E"/@C bundling across multiplecodewords within a downlink or special subframe is performed for all sering cells configured with a downlink
transmission mode that supports up to two transport blocks in case!L
DA0 I.
" *or T++ -:F+: configurations '! ! 3! <! 9U and a P-S@D transmission adjusted based on a detected
P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< with!L
DA0 I3 or <! )( (oo AC2
( = ! 36 ≤≤ ( as defined in Table
'6.'.3."7 or in Table '6.'.3."9 respectiely! where the alue of ) is replaced by !L DA0 . The -, shall not
transmit D/E"/@C on P-S@D if the -, does not receie P+S@D or P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink
SPS release in subframe(s) " n − where 2 " ∈ and <=!L
DA0 .
" *or T++ -:F+: configurations '! ! 3! <! 9U and a P-S@D transmission not adjusted based on a detected
P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< and a subframe n with ) I' or ! AC2
(o I D/E"/@C( ()!
'6 −≤≤ A ( as defined in subclause '6.'.3..'. The -, shall not transmit D/E"/@C on P-S@D if the -,
does not receie P+S@D or P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in subframe(s) " n − where
2 " ∈ .
" *or T++ -:F+: configurations '! ! 3! <! 9U and a P-S@D transmission not adjusted based on a detected
P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< and a subframe n with ) I3 or <! )( (oo AC2
( = ! 36 ≤≤ ( as defined
in Table '6.'.3."7 or in Table '6.'.3."9 respectiely. The -, shall not transmit D/E"/@C on P-S@D if the
-, does not receie P+S@D or P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in subframe(s) " n − where
2 " ∈ .
*or T++ D/E"/@C bundling! when the -, is configured by transmission mode 3! <! ?! 5 or '6 defined in subclause=.' and D/E"/@C bits are transmitted on P-S@D! the -, shall always generate D/E"/@C bits assuming both
codeword 6 and ' are enabled. *or the case that the -, detects only the P+S@D transmission associated with codeword6 within the bundled subframes! the -, shall generate B/@C for codeword '.
Table 7.3-K: Val$e of Do!l"!A ss"#!*e!% /!e>
D/+S 'S
!L DA0 > or
DL
DA0 > $*ber of s$bfra*es "% PDS< %ra!s*"ss"o! a!"% PD<=PD< "!"a%"!# D' SPS release
-6- 1 1 or ) or
-61 2 2 or or 1-
16- 3 3 or /
161 4 - or 4 or
Table 7.3-L: &,l"!A asso"a%"o! "!e> k F for TDD
TDD &'D'o!f"#$ra%"o
!
s$bfra*e !$*ber n
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 4 4
2 4 43 4 4 4
4 4 4
) 4
/ / ) / /
Table 7.3-M: Val$e of!L
DA0 e%er*"!e b %e D/ f"el "! D/ for*a% 04
D/+S 'S
!L
DA0
-6- 1-61 2
16- 3
161 4
*or T++ D/E"/@C multiple%ing and a subframe n with '> ) ! spatial D/E"/@C bundling across multiplecodewords within a downlink or special subframe is performed by a logical /B+ operation of all the correspondingindiidual D/E"/@Cs. 1n case the -, is transmitting on P-S@D! the -, shall determine the number of D/E"/@C
feedback bits AC2 4 and the D/E"/@C feedback bits AC2
no ! '!!6 −= AC2 4n to be transmitted in subframe
n.
" 1f the P-S@D transmission is adjusted based on a detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< intended for
the -,! then !L DA0 AC2 > 4 = unless <=!L DA0 > and 6=+ ** DA0 N ! in which case the -, shall not transmit
D/E"/@C. The spatially bundled D/E"/@C for a P+S@D transmission with a corresponding
P+@@DF,P+@@D or for a P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in subframe " n − is associated
with AC2
" DA0 o ')( − where DA0"E is the alue of +/1 in +@1 format '/F'>F'+F'FF/F>F@F+ detected in
subframe " n − . *or the case with 6>** N ! the D/E"/@C associated with a P+S@D transmission without
a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D is mapped to AC2
4 AC2 o
'− . The D/E"/@C feedback bits without any detected
P+S@D transmission or without detected P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release are set to B/@C.
" 1f the P-S@D transmission is not adjusted based on a detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< intended
for the -,! ) 4 AC2 = ! and
AC2
io is associated with the spatially bundled D/E"/@C for downlink or
special subframe i" n − ! where 2 " i ∈ . The D/E"/@C feedback bits without any detected P+S@D
transmission or without detected P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release are set to B/@C. The -,
*or T++ when a P-@@D format 3 transmission of D/E"/@C coincides with a sub"frame configured to the -, byhigher layers for transmission of a scheduling re0uest! the -, shall multiple% D/E"/@C and S bits on D/E"/@C P-@@D resource as defined in subclause 7..3.' in <4! unless the D/E"/@C corresponds to one of the followingcases
" a single P+S@D transmission only on the primary cell indicated by the detection of a corresponding
P+@@DF,P+@@D in subframe m" n − ! where 2 " m ∈ ! and for T++ -:F+: configurations '"9 the +/1 aluein the P+@@DF,P+@@D is e0ual to K'K (defined in Table =.3"A)! or a P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink
SPS release (defined in subclause 5.) in subframe m" n − ! where 2 " m ∈ ! and for T++ -:F+: configurations
'"9 the +/1 alue in the P+@@DF,P+@@D is e0ual to K'K! or
" a single P+S@D transmission only on the primary cell where there is not a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D
detected within subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ and no P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release
(defined in subclause 5.) within subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ ! or
" a P+S@D transmission only on the primary cell where there is not a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D detected
within subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ and an additional P+S@D transmission only on the primary cell
indicated by the detection of a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D in subframe m" n − ! where 2 " m ∈ with the
+/1 alue in the P+@@DF,P+@@D e0ual to K'K (defined in Table =.3"A) or a P+@@DF,P+@@D indicatingdownlink SPS release (defined in subclause 5.) in the subframe m" n − ! where 2 " m ∈ with the +/1 alue in
the P+@@DF,P+@@D e0ual to K'K!
in which case the -, shall transmit the D/E"/@C and scheduling re0uest according to the procedure for P-@@Dformat 'b with channel selection in T++.
*or T++ when the -, is configured with D/E"/@C bundling! D/E"/@C multiple%ing or P-@@D format 'b withchannel selection! and when both D/E"/@C and S are transmitted in the same sub"frame! a -, shall transmit the
bundled D/E"/@C or the multiple D/E"/@C responses (according to subclause '6.') on its assigned D/E"
/@C P-@@D resources for a negatie S transmission. *or a positie S! the -, shall transmit )'()!6( ++ on its
assigned S P-@@D resource using P-@@D format 'b according to subclause 7.<.' in 34. The alue of )'()!6( ++ are
generated according to Table =.3"' from the ∑−
=+
'
6
!
DLcells N
c
c DA0 ** ! N D/E"/@C responses including /@C in response
to P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release by spatial D/E"/@C bundling across multiple codewords
within each P+S@D transmission for all sering cells DLcells N . *or T++ -:F+: configurations '"9! if 6
'
6
! >∑
−
=
DLcells N
c
c DA0 !
and ( ) '<mod'!! +−≠ c DA0 DL
c DA0 ! > for a sering cell c! the -, detects that at least one downlink assignment has been
*or T++ if the parameter simultaneousAc"Nac"AndC50 proided by higher layers is set TR!, and if the -, isconfigured with D/E"/@C bundling! D/E"/@C multiple%ing or P-@@D format 'b with channel selection! and ifthe -, receies P+S@D andFor P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release only on the primary cell within
subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ ! a -, shall transmit the @S1 and )'()!6( ++ using P-@@D format b for normal @P or
P-@@D format for e%tended @P! according to subclause 7..3.< in <4 with '6 !aa ′′′′ replaced by )'()!6( ++ . The alue of
)'()!6( ++ are generated according to Table =.3"' from the ∑−
=
+'
6
!
DLcells N
c
c DA0 ** ! N D/E"/@C responses including /@C
in response to P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release by spatial D/E"/@C bundling across multiple
codewords within each P+S@D transmission for all sering cells DLcells N . *or T++ -:F+: configurations '"9! if
6
'
6
! >∑
−
=
DLcells N
c
c DA0 ! and ( ) '<mod'!! +−≠ c DA0
DLc DA0 ! > for a sering cell c! the -, detects that at least one downlink
assignment has been missed.
*or T++ if the parameter simultaneousAc"Nac"AndC50 proided by higher layers is set TR!, and if the -, isconfigured with P-@@D format 'b with channel selection and receies at least one P+S@D on the secondary cell
within subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ ! the -, shall drop the @S1 and transmit D/E"/@C according to subclause'6.'.3.
*or T++ and a -, is configured with P-@@D format 3!
if the parameter simultaneousAc"Nac"AndC50 is set TR! and if the -, receies!
" a single P+S@D transmission only on the primary cell indicated by the detection of a corresponding
P+@@DF,P+@@D in subframe m" n − ! where 2 "
m ∈ ! and for T++ -:F+: configurations '"9 the +/1 alue
in the P+@@DF,P+@@D is e0ual to K'K (defined in Table =.3"A)! or a P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink
SPS release (defined in subclause 5.) in subframe m" n − ! where 2 " m ∈ ! and for T++ -:F+: configurations
'"9 the +/1 alue in the P+@@DF,P+@@D is e0ual to K'K! or
" a single P+S@D transmission only on the primary cell where there is not a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@Ddetected within subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ and no P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release
(defined in subclause 5.) within subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ !
then the -, shall transmit the @S1 and D/E"/@C using P-@@D format FaFb according to subclause 7..3.< in <4else if
" the parameter simultaneousAc"Nac"AndC50#3ormatF#r$$ is set TR! and if P-@@D format 3 resource isdetermined according to subclause '6.'.3.' or subclause '6.'.3.. and
o if the total number of bits in the subframe corresponding to D/E"/@Cs! S (if any)! and the @S1 is
not larger than ! or
o if the total number of bits in the subframe corresponding to spatially bundled D/E"/@Cs! S (if
any)! and the @S1 is not larger than
then the -, shall transmit the D/E"/@Cs! S (if any) and the @S1 using the determined P-@@D format 3 resourceaccording to <4
else!
the -, shall drop the @S1 and transmit the D/E"/@C according to subclause '6.'.3.
/.3.2.2 !(( ;ARK%AM reportin" procedure for different +<'(< confi"urations
*or a configured sering cell! the +:"reference -:F+: configuration as defined in subclause '6. is referred to as the8+:"reference -:F+: configuration8 in the rest of this subclause.
*or a configured sering cell! if the +:"reference -:F+: configuration is 6! then the +/1 in +@1 format'F'/F'>F'+FF/F>F@F+ is not used.
The -, shall upon detection of a P+S@D transmission or a P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release
(defined in subclause 5.) within subframe(s) " n − for sering cell c! where c 2 " ∈ intended for the -, and for
which D/E"/@C response shall be proided! transmit the D/E"/@C response in -: subframe n! wherein set c 2
contains alues of 2 " ∈ such that subframe n#" corresponds to a downlink subframe or a special subframe for sering
cell c! where +: subframe or special subframe of sering cell c is according to the higher layer parameter eimta#-AR5#
ReferenceConfi#r$% if the -, is configured with the higher layer parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% forsering cell c; 2 defined in Table '6.'.3.'"' (where 8-:F+: configuration8 in Table '6.'.3.'"' refers to the +:"
reference -:F+: configuration) is associated with subframe n. c ) is the number of elements in set c 2 associated
with subframe n for sering cell c.
*or the remainder of this subclause c 2 2 = .
1f the -, is configured with the parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for the primary cell! R-:F+: configurationof the primary cell in the rest of this subclause refers to R+:"reference -:F+: configuration of the primary cell.
hen P-@@D format 3 is configured for transmission of D/E"/@C! for special subframe configurations 6 and 7with normal downlink @P or configurations 6 and < with e%tended downlink @P in a sering cell! shown in table <."'
34! the special subframe of the sering cell is e%cluded from the D/E"/@C codebook si&e determination. 1n thiscase! if the sering cell is the primary cell! there is no P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in the specialsubframe.
1f the -:"reference -:F+: configuration (defined in Sec ?.6) belongs to '!!3!<!7!9U for a sering cell! a alue!L
DA0 is
determined by the +ownlink /ssignment 1nde% (+/1) in +@1 format 6F< corresponding to a P-S@D on the sering cell
according to Table =.3"\ in subframe K" n − ! where K" is defined in Table =.3"W and the 8T++ -:F+: @onfiguration8
in Table =.3"W refers to the -:"reference -:F+: configuration (defined in subclause ?.6) for the sering cell. 1n caseneither P+S@D transmission! nor P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating the downlink SPS resource release is intended to the
-,! the -, can e%pect that the alue of!L
DA0 is set to < by the +/1 in +@1 format 6F< if transmitted.
1f the +:"reference -:F+: configuration belongs to '!!3!<!7!9U! the alue of the +/1 in +@1 format
'F'/F'>F'+FF/F>F@F+ denotes the accumulatie number of P+@@DF,P+@@D (s) with assigned P+S@Dtransmission(s) and P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release up to the present subframe within subframe(s)
" n − of each configured sering cell! where 2 " ∈ ! and shall be updated from subframe to subframe. +enote DL
c DA0 > !
as the alue of the +/1 in P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 'F'/F'>F'+FF/F>F@F+ detected by the -,
according to Table =.3"A in subframe m" n − in sering cell c ! where m" is the smallest alue in the set 2 such that
the -, detects a +@1 format 'F'/F'>F'+FF/F>F@F+.
*or all T++ -:F+: configurations! denote c DA0 ! ! as the total number of P+@@DF,P+@@D (s) with assigned P+S@D
transmission(s) and P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release detected by the -, within the subframe(s)
" n − in sering cell c ! where 2 " ∈ . +enote ** N ! which can be &ero or one! as the number of P+S@D transmissions
without a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D within the subframe(s) " n− ! where 2 " ∈ .
1f P-@@D format 3 is configured for transmission of D/E"/@C! the D/E"/@C feedback bits AC2
4c
AC2 c
AC2 c AC2
c
ooo'!
'!6! !...!− for the c"th sering cell configured by @ are constructed as follows! where cH6!
DL
c
AC2
c /4 = if transmission mode configured in the c"th sering cell supports one transport block or spatial D/E"
/@C bundling is applied and DL
c
AC2
c /4 = otherwise! where DL
c / is the number of downlink and special subframes
for which the -, needs to feedback D/E"/@C bits for the c"th sering cell.
" *or the case that the -, is transmitting in subframe n on P-@@D or a P-S@D transmission not adjusted basedon a detected +@1 format 6F< or a P-S@D transmission adjusted based on an associated detected +@1 format 6F<
with -:"reference -:F+: configuration 6 (defined in Sec ?.6)! then c
DL
c ) / = . The -, shall not transmit
D/E"/@C on P-S@D if the -, does not receie P+S@D or P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPSrelease in subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ .
" 1f +:"reference -:F+: configuration of each of the configured sering cells belongs to 6! '! ! 3! <! 9U and fora P-S@D transmission in a subframe n adjusted based on a detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F<using -:"reference -:F+: configuration belonging to '!!3!<!7!9U (defined in Sec ?.6)! the -, shall assume
( )c!L
DA0
DL
c ) / !min= . The -, shall not transmit D/E"/@C on P-S@D if the -, does not receie
P+S@D or P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in subframe(s) " n − where 2 " ∈ and
<=!L
DA0 .
" 1f +:"reference -:F+: configuration of at least one configured sering cell belongs to 7U and for a P-S@Dtransmission adjusted based on an associated detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< using -:"reference -:F+: configuration belonging to '!!3!<!7!9U (defined in Sec ?.6)! the -, shall assume
( )( )c!L
DA0
!L
DA0
DL
c ) ! / !<<min −+= ! where ! denotes the ma%imum alue of c! among all the
configured sering cells! c! is the total number of receied P+S@Ds and P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating
downlink SPS release in subframe(s) " n− for the c"th sering cell! 2 " ∈ . The -, shall not transmit D/E"
/@C on P-S@D if the -, does not receie P+S@D or P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in
subframe(s) " n− where 2 " ∈ and <=!L
DA0 .
hen P-@@D format 3 is configured for transmission of D/E"/@C!
" if +:"reference -:F+: configuration belongs to '!!3!<!7!9U! the D/E"/@C for a P+S@D transmission
with a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D or for a P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in
subframe " n − is associated with AC2
" DA0 co ')(! − if transmission mode configured in the c"th sering cell supports
one transport block or spatial D/E"/@C bundling is applied! or associated with AC2
" DA0 co )(! − and
AC2 " DA0 co ')(! − otherwise! where DA0"E is the alue of +/1 in +@1 format '/F'>F'+F'FF/F>F@F+ detected
in subframe " n − ! AC2
" DA0 co )(! − and AC2
" DA0 co ')(! − are the D/E"/@C feedback for codeword 6 and
codeword '! respectiely. *or the case with 6>** N ! the D/E"/@C associated with a P+S@D transmission
without a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D is mapped to AC2
4c
AC2
c
o
'! − The D/E"/@C feedback bits without
any detected P+S@D transmission or without detected P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release areset to B/@C
" if +:"reference -:F+: configuration is 6! the D/E"/@C for a P+S@D transmission or for a
P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in subframe " n − is associated with !6
AC2
co if transmission
mode configured in the c"th sering cell supports one transport block or spatial D/E"/@C bundling is applied!
or associated with !6
AC2
co and !'
AC2
co otherwise! where !6
AC2
co and !'
AC2
co are the D/E"/@C feedback for
codeword 6 and codeword '! respectiely. The D/E"/@C feedback bits without any detected P+S@D
transmission or without detected P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release are set to B/@C.
1f +:"reference -:F+: configuration of each of the sering cells belongs to 6!'!!3!<!9U and if P-@@D format 'b
with channel selection is configured for transmission of D/E"/@C and for two configured sering cells! the D/E"
/@C feedback bits AC2
4
AC2 AC2 AC2 ooo
''6 !...!
− on P-S@D are constructed as follows
" if -:"reference -:F+: configuration (defined in Sec ?.6) belongs to '! ! 3! <! 9U! for a P-S@D transmission
adjusted based on a detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< with!L
DA0 I' or ! AC2
(o is determined as
if P-@@D format 3 is configured for transmission of D/E"/@C! e%cept that spatial D/E"/@C bundlingacross multiple codewords within a downlink or special subframe is performed for all sering cells configured
with a downlink transmission mode that supports up to two transport blocks in case!L
DA0 I! where the -:"
reference -:F+: configuration is the -:"reference -:F+: configuration of the sering cell corresponding to theP-S@D transmission.
" if -:"reference -:F+: configuration (defined in Sec ?.6) belongs to '! ! 3! <! 9U! for a P-S@D transmissionadjusted based on a detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< with
!L
DA0 I3 or <! )( (oo AC2
( = !
36 ≤≤ ( as defined in Table '6.'.3."7 or in Table '6.'.3."9 respectiely! where the alue of ) is replaced by
!L DA0 where the -:"reference -:F+: configuration is the -:"reference -:F+: configuration of the sering cell
corresponding to the P-S@D transmission. The -, shall not transmit D/E"/@C on P-S@D if the -, does
not receie P+S@D or P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in subframe(s) " n − where 2 " ∈
and <=!L
DA0 .
" if -:"reference -:F+: configuration (defined in Sec ?.6) is 6! or if -:"reference -:F+: configuration (definedin Sec ?.6) belongs to '! ! 3! <! 9U! for a P-S@D transmission not adjusted based on a detectedP+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F<! for a subframe n with ) I' or ( ) defined in Sec '6.'.3..')!
AC2
(o I D/E"/@C( ()! '6 −≤≤ A ( as defined in subclause '6.'.3..'! where the -:"reference -:F+:
configuration is the -:"reference -:F+: configuration of the sering cell corresponding to the P-S@Dtransmission. The -, shall not transmit D/E"/@C on P-S@D if the -, does not receie P+S@D or
P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in subframe(s) " n − where 2 " ∈ .
" if -:"reference -:F+: configuration (defined in Sec ?.6) is 6! or if -:"reference -:F+: configuration (definedin Sec ?.6) belongs to '! ! 3! <! 9U and! for a P-S@D transmission not adjusted based on a detectedP+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F<! for a subframe n with ) I3 or < ( ) defined in Sec '6.'.3..')!
)( (oo AC2 ( = ! 36 ≤≤ ( as defined in Table '6.'.3."7 or in Table '6.'.3."9 respectiely! where the -:"
reference -:F+: configuration is the -:"reference -:F+: configuration of the sering cell corresponding to theP-S@D transmission. The -, shall not transmit D/E"/@C on P-S@D if the -, does not receie P+S@D or
P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in subframe(s) " n − where 2 " ∈ .
hen a P-@@D format 3 transmission of D/E"/@C coincides with a sub"frame configured to the -, by higherlayers for transmission of a scheduling re0uest! the -, shall multiple% D/E"/@C and S bits on D/E"/@CP-@@D resource as defined in subclause 7..3.' in <4! unless the D/E"/@C corresponds to one of the followingcases
" a single P+S@D transmission only on the primary cell indicated by the detection of a corresponding
P+@@DF,P+@@D in subframe m" n − ! where 2 "
m ∈ ! and for -:F+: configuration of the primary cell
belonging to '!!3!<!7!9U! the +/1 alue in the P+@@DF,P+@@D is e0ual to K'K (defined in Table =.3"A)! or a
P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release (defined in subclause 5.) in subframem
" n − ! where
2 " m ∈ ! and for -:F+: configuration of the primary cell belonging to '!!3!<!7!9U the +/1 alue in the
P+@@DF,P+@@D is e0ual to K'K! or
" a single P+S@D transmission only on the primary cell where there is not a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D
detected within subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ and no P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release
(defined in subclause 5.) within subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ ! or
" a P+S@D transmission only on the primary cell where there is not a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D detected
within subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ and an additional P+S@D transmission only on the primary cell
indicated by the detection of a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D in subframe m" n − ! where 2 " m ∈ with the
+/1 alue in the P+@@DF,P+@@D e0ual to K'K (defined in Table =.3"A) or a P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating
downlink SPS release (defined in subclause 5.) in the subframe m
" n
− ! where 2 "
m ∈ with the +/1 alue inthe P+@@DF,P+@@D e0ual to K'K!
in which case the -, shall transmit the D/E"/@C and scheduling re0uest according to the procedure for P-@@Dformat 'b with channel selection in T++.
1f the parameter simultaneousAc"Nac"AndC50 proided by higher layers is set TR!, and if the -, is configured withP-@@D format 'b with channel selection! and if the -, receies P+S@D andFor P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating
downlink SPS release only on the primary cell within subframe(s) " n− ! where 2 " ∈ ! a -, shall transmit the @S1 and
)'()!6( ++ using P-@@D format b for normal @P or P-@@D format for e%tended @P! according to subclause 7..3.<
in <4 with '6 !aa ′′′′ replaced by )'()!6( ++ . The alue of )'()!6( ++ are generated according to Table =.3"' from the
∑
−
=
+'
6
!
DLcells N
c
c DA0 ** ! N D/E"/@C responses including /@C in response to P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink
SPS release by spatial D/E"/@C bundling across multiple codewords within each P+S@D transmission for all
sering cells DLcells N . 1f +:"reference -:F+: configuration belongs to '!!3!<!7!9U and! if 6
'
6
! >∑
−
=
DLcells N
c
c DA0 ! and
( ) '<mod'!! +−≠ c DA0 DL
c DA0 ! > for a sering cell c! the -, detects that at least one downlink assignment has been
missed.
1f the parameter simultaneousAc"Nac"AndC50 proided by higher layers is set TR!, and if the -, is configured withP-@@D format 'b with channel selection and receies at least one P+S@D on the secondary cell within subframe(s)
" n − ! where 2 " ∈ ! the -, shall drop the @S1 and transmit D/E"/@C according to subclause '6.'.3.
hen both D/E"/@C and @S1 are configured to be transmitted in the same sub"frame and if a -, is configured withP-@@D format 3!
if the parameter simultaneousAc"Nac"AndC50 is set TR! and if the -, receies
" a single P+S@D transmission only on the primary cell indicated by the detection of a corresponding
P+@@DF,P+@@D in subframe m" n − ! where 2 " m ∈ ! and for -:F+: configuration of the primary cell
belonging to '!!3!<!7!9U the +/1 alue in the P+@@DF,P+@@D is e0ual to K'K (defined in Table =.3"A)! or a
P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release (defined in subclause 5.) in subframe m" n − ! where 2 " m ∈ ! and for -:F+: configuration of the primary cell belonging to '!!3!<!7!9U the +/1 alue in the
P+@@DF,P+@@D is e0ual to K'K! or
" a single P+S@D transmission only on the primary cell where there is not a corresponding P+@@D detected
within subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ and no P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release (defined in
subclause 5.) within subframe(s) " n − ! where 2 " ∈ !
then the -, shall transmit the @S1 and D/E"/@C using P-@@D format FaFb according to subclause 7..3.< in <4
else if
" the parameter simultaneousAc"Nac"AndC50#3ormatF#r$$ is set TR! and if P-@@D format 3 resource is
determined according to subclause '6.'.3.' or subclause '6.'.3.. and
o if the total number of bits in the subframe corresponding to D/E"/@Cs! S (if any)! and the @S1 is
not larger than ! or
o if the total number of bits in the subframe corresponding to spatially bundled D/E"/@Cs! S (if
any)! and the @S1 is not larger than
then the -, shall transmit the D/E"/@Cs! S (if any) and the @S1 using the determined P-@@D format 3 resourceaccording to <4
else!
the -, shall drop the @S1 and transmit the D/E"/@C according to subclause '6.'.3.
/.3.3 F((%!(( ;ARK%AM reportin" procedure for primary cell framestructure type 1
*or *++"T++ and the primary cell is frame structure type '! with P-@@D format 'b with channel selection!
" for a negatie S transmission!
" -, shall transmit the D/E"/@C on its assigned D/E"/@C P-@@D resource with channel selection as
defined in subclause '6.'./.
" for a positie S transmission!
" if one transport block or two transport blocks or a P+@@DF,P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release is
detected on the primary cell in subframe i ! and if subframe i is an uplink or a special subframe of
configurations 6 and 7 with normal downlink @P or of configurations 6 and < with e%tended downlink @P for the secondary cell according to the higher layer parameter subframe/ssignment for -, not configured with
the higher layer parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% and according to the higher layer parameter eimta#-AR5#ReferenceConfi#r$% for -, configured with the higher layer parameter 0)TA#
)ainConfi*ervCell#r$%,
" -, shall transmit the D/E"/@C and S as for *++ with P-@@D format 'aF'b as described insubclause =.3.'.
" otherwise
" -, shall transmit the D/E"/@C and S as for *++ with P-@@D format 'b with channel selection asdescribed in subclause =.3.'.
*or *++"T++ and the primary cell is frame structure type '! when P-@@D format 3 is configured for transmission ofD/E"/@C! for special subframe configurations 6 and 7 with normal downlink @P or configurations 6 and < with
e%tended downlink @P in a sering cell! shown in table <."' 34! the special subframe of the sering cell is e%cludedfrom the D/E"/@C codebook si&e determination.
*or *++"T++ and the primary cell is frame structure type '! when a P-@@D format 3 transmission of D/E"/@Ccoincides with a sub"frame configured to the -, by higher layers for transmission of a scheduling re0uest! the -, shallmultiple% D/E"/@C and S bits on D/E"/@C P-@@D resource as defined in subclause 7..3.' in <4! unless the
D/E"/@C corresponds to a P+S@D transmission on the primary cell only or a P+@@DF,P+@@D indicatingdownlink SPS release on the primary cell only! in which case the S shall be transmitted as for *++ with P-@@Dformat 'aF'b as described in subclause =.3.'.
*or *++"T++ and for a P-S@D transmission! a -, shall not transmit D/E"/@C on P-S@D in subframe n if the-, does not receie P+S@D or P+@@D indicating downlink SPS release in subframe n#@.
hen only a positie S is transmitted! a -, shall use P-@@D *ormat ' for the S resource as defined in subclause7.<.' in 34.
/.3.4 F((%!(( ;ARK%AM reportin" procedure for primary cell framestructure type 2
hen only a positie S is transmitted! a -, shall use P-@@D *ormat ' for the S resource as defined in subclause7.<.' in 34.
The *++"T++ D/E"/@C reporting procedure follows the D/E"/@C procedure described in subclause =.3..with the following e%ceptions#
" for a sering cell with frame structure type '! and a -, not configured to monitor P+@@DF,P+@@D in anothersering cell for scheduling the sering cell! 2 is defined in Table '6.'.3/"'! otherwise 2 is defined in Table'6.'.3.'"'.
" for a sering cell with frame structure type ' and a -, not configured to monitor P+@@DF,P+@@D in anothersering cell for scheduling the sering cell! if the +:"reference -:F+: configuration of the sering cell in Table
'6.'.3/"' belongs to !3!<U! DL
c / is determined as in subclause =.3.. for a sering cell with +:"reference
-:F+: configuration 7U.
" for a sering cell with frame structure type '! and if P-@@D format 3 is configured for transmission of D/E"/@C! and for a P-S@D transmission in a subframe n adjusted based on a detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1format 6F<! the -, shall assume the -:"reference -:F+: configuration of the sering cell belongs to'!!3!<!7!9U.
" for a sering cell with frame structure type '! and if +:"reference -:F+: configuration of each of the sering
cells belongs to 6!'!!3!<!9U! and if P-@@D format 'b with channel selection is configured for transmission ofD/E"/@C and for two configured sering cells! the -, shall assume the -:"reference -:F+: configurationof the sering cell belongs to '!!3!<!9U.
" for a sering cell with frame structure type '! a alue!L
DA0 is determined by the +ownlink /ssignment 1nde%
(+/1) in +@1 format 6F< corresponding to a P-S@D on the sering cell according to Table =.3"\ in subframeK" n − ! where K" I<.
" for a sering cell with frame structure type '! when P-@@D format 3 is configured for transmission of D/E"/@C! if the +:"reference -:F+: configuration of the sering cell is 6! the D/E"/@C for a P+S@D
transmission with a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D in subframe " n − is associated with AC2
" DA0 co ')(! − if
transmission mode configured in the c"th sering cell supports one transport block or spatial D/E"/@C
bundling is applied! or associated with AC2
" DA0 co )(! − and AC2
" DA0 co ')(! − otherwise! where DA0"E is the alue of
+/1 in +@1 format '/F'>F'+F'FF/F>F@F+ detected in subframe " n − ! AC2
" DA0 co )(! − and AC2
" DA0 co ')(! − are
the D/E"/@C feedback for codeword 6 and codeword '! respectiely. *or the case with 6>** N ! the
D/E"/@C associated with a P+S@D transmission without a corresponding P+@@DF,P+@@D is mapped to AC2
4c AC2
c
o'! − . The D/E"/@C feedback bits without any detected P+S@D transmission are set to B/@C.
*hysical uplin# shared channel related procedures
1f the -, is configured with a S@G! the -, shall apply the procedures described in this clause for both 2@G and S@G
" hen the procedures are applied for 2@G! the terms Nsecondary cellO! Nsecondary cellsO ! Nsering cellO! Nsering
cellsO in this clause refer to secondary cell! secondary cells! sering cell! sering cells belonging to the 2@Grespectiely.
" hen the procedures are applied for S@G! the terms Nsecondary cellO! Nsecondary cellsO! Nsering cellO! NseringcellsO in this clause refer to secondary cell! secondary cells (not including PS@ell)! sering cell! sering cells belonging to the S@G respectiely. The term Nprimary cellO in this clause refers to the PS@ell of the S@G.
*or *++ and transmission mode '! there shall be ? uplink D/E processes per sering cell for non"subframe bundlingoperation! i.e. normal D/E operation! and 3 uplink D/E processes for subframe bundling operation when parameter e#-AR5#attern#r$% is set to TR! and < uplink D/E processes for subframe bundling operationotherwise. *or *++ and transmission mode ! there shall be '9 uplink D/E processes per sering cell for non"subframe bundling operation and there are two D/E processes associated with a gien subframe as described in ?4.The subframe bundling operation is configured by the parameter tti/undlin proided by higher layers.
1n case higher layers configure the use of subframe bundling for *++ and T++! the subframe bundling operation isonly applied to -:"S@D! such that four consecutie uplink subframes are used.
.- +, procedure for transmittin" the physical uplin# sharedchannel
The term R-:F+: configuration in this subclause refers to the higher layer parameter suframeAssinment unlessspecified otherwise.
*or *++ and normal D/E operation! the -, shall upon detection on a gien sering cell of a P+@@DF,P+@@D with+@1 format 6F< andFor a PD1@D transmission in subframe n intended for the -,! adjust the corresponding P-S@Dtransmission in subframe n+@ according to the P+@@DF,P+@@D and PD1@D information.
*or *++"T++ and normal D/E operation and a P-S@D for sering cell c with frame structure type '! the -, shallupon detection of a P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6F< andFor a PD1@D transmission in subframe n intended forthe -,! adjust the corresponding P-S@D transmission for sering cell c in subframe n+@ according to theP+@@DF,P+@@D and PD1@D information.
*or normal D/E operation! if the -, detects a PD1@D transmission and if the most recent P-S@D transmission forthe same transport block was using spatial multiple%ing according to subclause ?.6. and the -, does not detect aP+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format < in subframe n intended for the -,! the -, shall adjust the corresponding P-S@Dretransmission in the associated subframe according to the PD1@D information! and using the number of transmissionlayers and precoding matri% according to the most recent P+@@DF,P+@@D! if the number of negatiely acknowledged
transport blocks is e0ual to the number of transport blocks indicated in the most recent P+@@DF,P+@@D associatedwith the corresponding P-S@D.
*or normal D/E operation! if the -, detects a PD1@D transmission and if the most recent P-S@D transmission forthe same transport block was using spatial multiple%ing according to subclause ?.6. and the -, does not detect aP+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format < in subframe n intended for the -,! and if the number of negatiely
acknowledged transport blocks is not e0ual to the number of transport blocks indicated in the most recentP+@@DF,P+@@D associated with the corresponding P-S@D then the -, shall adjust the corresponding P-S@Dretransmission in the associated subframe according to the PD1@D information! using the precoding matri% withcodebook inde% 6 and the number of transmission layers e0ual to number of layers corresponding to the negatiely
acknowledged transport block from the most recent P+@@DF,P+@@D. 1n this case! the -: +2S resources arecalculated according to the cyclic shift field for +2S 34 in the most recent P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format <
associated with the corresponding P-S@D transmission and number of layers corresponding to the negatielyacknowledged transport block.
1f a -, is configured with the carrier indicator field for a gien sering cell! the -, shall use the carrier indicator fieldalue from the detected P+@@DF,P+@@D with uplink +@1 format to determine the sering cell for the correspondingP-S@D transmission.
*or *++ and normal D/E operation! if a P+@@DF,P+@@D with @S1 re0uest field set to trigger an aperiodic @S1report! as described in subclause =..'! is detected by a -, on subframe n, then on subframe n+@ -@1 is mapped on the
corresponding P-S@D transmission! when simultaneous P-S@D and P-@@D transmission is not configured for the-,.
*or *++"T++ and normal D/E operation! for a sering cell with frame structure type '! if a P+@@DF,P+@@Dwith @S1 re0uest field set to trigger an aperiodic @S1 report! as described in subclause =..'! is detected by a -, onsubframe n, then on subframe n+@ -@1 is mapped on the corresponding P-S@D transmission! when simultaneous
P-S@D and P-@@D transmission is not configured for the -,.
*or T++! if a -, is configured with the parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for at least one sering cell! if the-, is configured with one sering cell or if the -, is configured with more than one sering cell and the T++ -:F+:configuration of all the configured sering cells is the same! then for a gien sering cell! the sering cell -:F+:configuration is the -:"reference -:F+: configuration.
*or T++! if a -, is configured with more than one sering cell and if the -:F+: configurations of at least two seringcells are different! if the sering cell is a primary cell or if the -, is not configured to monitor P+@@DF,P+@@D inanother sering cell for scheduling the sering cell! the sering cell -:F+: configuration is the -:"reference -:F+:configuration.
*or T++! if a -, is configured with more than one sering cell and if the -:F+: configurations of at least two seringcells are different and if the sering cell is a secondary cell and if the -, is configured to monitor P+@@DF,P+@@D inanother sering cell for scheduling the sering cell! then for the sering cell! the -: reference -:F+: configuration isgien in Table ?"6/ corresponding to the pair formed by (other sering cell -:F+: configuration! sering cell -:F+:configuration).
*or *++"T++ and primary cell frame structure type ! if a sering cell is a primary cell! the sering cell -:F+:configuration is the -:"reference -:F+: configuration for the sering cell.
*or *++"T++ if the -, is not configured to monitor P+@@DF,P+@@D in another sering cell for scheduling asecondary sering cell with frame structure type ! the sering cell -:F+: configuration is the -:"reference -:F+:
configuration for the sering cell.
*or *++"T++! and for secondary sering cell c with frame structure type ! if the -, is configured to monitorP+@@DF,P+@@D in another sering cell with frame structure type ' for scheduling the sering cell! the sering cell-:F+: configuration is the -:"reference -:F+: configuration for the sering cell.
*or *++"T++! if a -, is configured with more than one sering cell with frame structure type ! and if the sering cellis a secondary cell with frame structure type and if the -, is configured to monitor P+@@DF,P+@@D in anothersering cell with frame structure type for scheduling the sering cell! then for the sering cell! the -: reference-:F+: configuration is gien in Table ?"6/ corresponding to the pair formed by (other sering cell -:F+:configuration! sering cell -:F+: configuration).
1f a -, is configured with the parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for a sering cell! for a radio frame of thesering cell! P-S@D transmissions can occur only in subframes that are indicated by e12T/"-:F+:"configuration as
uplink subframe(s) for the sering cell unless specified otherwise.
*or T++ and normal D/E operation! if a P+@@DF,P+@@D with @S1 re0uest field set to trigger an aperiodic @S1report! as described in subclause =..'! is detected by a -, on subframe n! then on subframe n+" -@1 is mapped on thecorresponding P-S@D transmission where " is gien by Table ?"! when simultaneous P-S@D and P-@@Dtransmission is not configured for the -,.
*or *++"T++ normal D/E operation! for a sering cell with frame structure type ! if a P+@@DF,P+@@D with @S1re0uest field set to trigger an aperiodic @S1 report on the sering cell! as described in subclause =..'! is detected by a-, on subframe n, then on subframe n+" -@1 is mapped on the corresponding P-S@D transmission where " is gien by Table ?" and the RT++ -:F+: configuration refers to the -:"reference -:F+: configuration for the sering cell!when simultaneous P-S@D and P-@@D transmission is not configured for the -,.
hen a -, is configured with higher layer parameter tti/undlin and configured with higher layer parameter e#-AR5#
attern#r$% set to 3AL* or not configured! for *++ and subframe bundling operation! the -, shall upon detection of aP+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6 in subframe n intended for the -,! andFor a PD1@D transmission in subframe n#G
intended for the -,! adjust the corresponding first P-S@D transmission in the bundle in subframe n+@ according to the
P+@@DF,P+@@D and PD1@D information.
hen a -, is configured with higher layer parameter tti/undlin and configured with higher layer parameter e#-AR5#
attern#r$% set to TR! ! for *++ and subframe bundling operation! the -, shall upon detection of aP+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6 in subframe n intended for the -,! andFor a PD1@D transmission in subframe n#$
intended for the -,! adjust the corresponding first P-S@D transmission in the bundle in subframe n+@ according to theP+@@DF,P+@@D and PD1@D information.
*or both *++ and T++ sering cells! the B+1 as signalled on P+@@DF,P+@@D! the $ as determined in subclause?.9.'! and the T>S as determined in subclause ?.9.! shall be deliered to higher layers.
*or T++ and transmission mode '! the number of D/E processes per sering cell shall be determined by the -:F+:
configuration (Table <." of 34)! as indicated in Table ?"'. *or T++ and transmission mode ! the number of D/E processes per sering cell for non"subframe bundling operation shall be twice the number determined by the -:F+:
configuration (Table <." of 34) as indicated in Table ?"' and there are two D/E processes associated with a giensubframe as described in ?4. *or T++ and both transmission mode ' and transmission mode ! the RT++ -:F+:configuration in Table ?"' refers to the -:"reference -:F+: configuration for the sering cell if -:"reference -:F+:configuration is defined for the sering cell and refers to the sering cell -:F+: configuration otherwise.
Table 8-1: $*ber of s!ro!o$s &' <R@ ,roesses for TDD
TDD &'D' o!f"#$ra%"o!$*ber of <R@ ,roesses for !or*al <R@ o,era%"o!
$*ber of <R@ ,roessesfor s$bfra*e b$!l"!# o,era%"o!
- / 3
1 4 2
2 2 7'A
3 3 7'A4 2 7'A
) 1 7'A
3
*or T++! if the -, is not configured with 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for any sering cell! and if a -, isconfigured with one sering cell! or if the -, is configured with more than one sering cell and the T++ -:F+:
configuration of all the configured sering cells is the same!
" *or T++ -:F+: configurations '"9 and normal D/E operation! the -, shall upon detection of aP+@@DF,P+@@D with uplink +@1 format andFor a PD1@D transmission in subframe n intended for the -,!adjust the corresponding P-S@D transmission in subframe n+" ! with " gien in Table ?"! according to the
P+@@DF,P+@@D and PD1@D information.
" *or T++ -:F+: configuration 6 and normal D/E operation the -, shall upon detection of aP+@@DF,P+@@D with uplink +@1 format andFor a PD1@D transmission in subframe n intended for the -,!adjust the corresponding P-S@D transmission in subframe n+" if the 2S> of the -: inde% in theP+@@DF,P+@@D with uplink +@1 format is set to ' or PD1@D is receied in subframe nI6 or 7 in the resource
corresponding to 6 -0C- 0 = ! as defined in subclause 5.'.! with " gien in Table ?". 1f! for T++ -:F+:
configuration 6 and normal D/E operation! the :S> of the -: inde% in the +@1 format 6F< is set to ' in
subframe n or a PD1@D is receied in subframe nI6 or 7 in the resource corresponding to ' -0C- 0 = ! as defined
in subclause 5.'.! or PD1@D is receied in subframe nI' or 9! the -, shall adjust the corresponding P-S@Dtransmission in subframe n+ . 1f! for T++ -:F+: configuration 6! both the 2S> and :S> of the -: inde% inthe P+@@DF,P+@@D with uplink +@1 format are set in subframe n! the -, shall adjust the correspondingP-S@D transmission in both subframes n+ " and n+ ! with " gien in Table ?".
*or T++! if a -, is configured with more than one sering cell and the T++ -:F+: configuration of at least twoconfigured sering cells is not the same or if the -, is configured with 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for at least onesering cell! or *++"T++!
" *or a sering cell with an -:"reference -:F+: configurations belonging to '!!3!<!7!9U and normal D/Eoperation! the -, shall upon detection of a P+@@DF,P+@@D with uplink +@1 format andFor a PD1@Dtransmission in subframe n intended for the -,! adjust the corresponding P-S@D transmission in subframe n+"
for the sering cell! with " gien in Table ?"! according to the P+@@DF,P+@@D and PD1@D information!where the 8T++ -:F+: @onfiguration8 gien in Table ?" refers to the -:"reference -:F+: configuration.
" *or a sering cell with -:"reference -:F+: configuration 6 and normal D/E operation the -, shall upondetection of a P+@@DF,P+@@D with uplink +@1 format andFor a PD1@D transmission in subframe n intended
for the -,! adjust the corresponding P-S@D transmission in subframe n+" for the sering cell if the 2S> of the-: inde% in the P+@@DF,P+@@D with uplink +@1 format is set to ' or PD1@D is receied in subframe nI6 or
7 in the resource corresponding to 6 -0C- 0 = ! as defined in subclause 5.'.! with " gien in Table ?". 1f! for a
sering cell with -:"reference -:F+: configuration 6 and normal D/E operation! the :S> of the -: inde% inthe +@1 format 6F< is set to ' in subframe n or a PD1@D is receied in subframe nI6 or 7 in the resource
corresponding to ' -0C- 0 = ! as defined in subclause 5.'.! or PD1@D is receied in subframe nI' or 9! the -,
shall adjust the corresponding P-S@D transmission in subframe n+ for the sering cell. 1f! for a sering cellwith -:"reference -:F+: configuration 6! both the 2S> and :S> of the -: inde% in the P+@@DF,P+@@Dwith uplink +@1 format are set in subframe n! the -, shall adjust the corresponding P-S@D transmission in both subframes n+ " and n+ for the sering cell! with " gien in Table ?"! where the T++ -:F+:@onfiguration8 gien in Table ?" refers to the -:"reference -:F+: configuration.
*or T++ -:F+: configurations ' and 9 and subframe bundling operation! the -, shall upon detection of a
P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6 in subframe n intended for the -,! andFor a PD1@D transmission intended for the-, in subframe n#l with l gien in Table ?"a! adjust the corresponding first P-S@D transmission in the bundle insubframe n+" ! with " gien in Table ?" , according to the P+@@DF,P+@@D and PD1@D information.
*or T++ -:F+: configuration 6 and subframe bundling operation! the -, shall upon detection of a P+@@DF,P+@@Dwith +@1 format 6 in subframe n intended for the -,! andFor a PD1@D transmission intended for the -, in subframe n#
l with l gien in Table ?"a! adjust the corresponding first P-S@D transmission in the bundle in subframe n+" ! if the
2S> of the -: inde% in the +@1 format 6 is set to ' or if 6 -0C- 0 = ! as defined in subclause 5.'.! with " gien in
Table ?"! according to the P+@@DF,P+@@D and PD1@D information. 1f! for T++ -:F+: configuration 6 andsubframe bundling operation! the :S> of the -: inde% in the P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6 is set to ' in
subframe n or if ' -0C- 0 = ! as defined in subclause 5.'.! the -, shall adjust the corresponding first P-S@D
transmission in the bundle in subframe n+ ! according to the P+@@DF,P+@@D and PD1@D information.
Table 8-2 k for TDD o!f"#$ra%"o!s 0-6
TDD &'D'o!f"#$ra%"o
!
s$bfra*e !$*ber n
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
- 4 4
1 4 4
2 4 4
3 4 4 4
4 4 4
) 4
/ / / / )
Table 8-2a l for TDD o!f"#$ra%"o!s 0 1 a! 6
TDD &'D'o!f"#$ra%"o
!
s$bfra*e !$*ber n
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-
1 2 3 2 3
) )
/ -, is semi"statically configured ia higher layer signalling to transmit P-S@D transmissions signalled iaP+@@DF,P+@@D according to one of two uplink transmission modes! denoted mode ' " .
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+@@Ds with the @@ scrambled by the @"BT1! the -, shall decodethe P+@@D according to the combination defined in Table ?"3 and transmit the corresponding P-S@D. The scramblinginitiali&ation of this P-S@D corresponding to these P+@@Ds and the P-S@D retransmission for the same transport block is by @"BT1.
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode ,P+@@Ds with the @@ scrambled by the @"BT1! the -, shall
decode the ,P+@@D according to the combination defined in Table ?"3/ and transmit the corresponding P-S@D. The
scrambling initiali&ation of this P-S@D corresponding to these ,P+@@Ds and the P-S@D retransmission for the sametransport block is by @"BT1.
Transmission mode ' is the default uplink transmission mode for a -, until the -, is assigned an uplink transmissionmode by higher layer signalling.
hen a -, configured in transmission mode receies a +@1 *ormat 6 uplink scheduling grant! it shall assume that theP-S@D transmission is associated with transport block ' and that transport block is disabled.
Table 8-3: PD< a! P&S< o!f"#$re b -RT/
Tra!s*"ss"o! *oe
D/ for*a% Sear S,aeTra!s*"ss"o! se*e of P&S<
orres,o!"!# %o PD<
ode 1 ($ format -ommon and
+, specific by %R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port 1- 0see subclause .-.1
ode 2($ format -
ommon and+, specific by %R7!$
Sin"le%antenna port6 port 1- 0see subclause .-.1
($ format 4 +, specific by %R7!$ losed%loop spatial multiple=in" 0see subclause .-.2
orres,o!"!# %o =PD<ode 1 ($ format - +, specific by %R7!$ Sin"le%antenna port6 port 1- 0see subclause .-.1
ode 2($ format - +, specific by %R7!$ Sin"le%antenna port6 port 1- 0see subclause .-.1
($ format 4 +, specific by %R7!$ losed%loop spatial multiple=in" 0see subclause .-.2
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+@@Ds with the @@ scrambled by the @"BT1 and is alsoconfigured to receie random access procedures initiated by 8P+@@D orders8! the -, shall decode the P+@@Daccording to the combination defined in Table ?"<.
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode ,P+@@Ds with the @@ scrambled by the @"BT1 and is also
configured to receie random access procedures initiated by 8P+@@D orders8! the -, shall decode the ,P+@@Daccording to the combination defined in Table ?"</.
D/ for*a% Sear S,ae($ format 1A +, specific by %R7!$
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+@@Ds with the @@ scrambled by the SPS @"BT1! the -, shall
decode the P+@@D according to the combination defined in Table ?"7 and transmit the corresponding [email protected] scrambling initiali&ation of this P-S@D corresponding to these P+@@Ds and P-S@D retransmission for the sametransport block is by SPS @"BT1. The scrambling initiali&ation of initial transmission of this P-S@D without acorresponding P+@@D and the P-S@D retransmission for the same transport block is by SPS @"BT1.
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode ,P+@@Ds with the @@ scrambled by the SPS @"BT1! the -, shalldecode the ,P+@@D according to the combination defined in Table ?"7/ and transmit the corresponding [email protected] scrambling initiali&ation of this P-S@D corresponding to these ,P+@@Ds and P-S@D retransmission for the sametransport block is by SPS @"BT1. The scrambling initiali&ation of initial transmission of this P-S@D without acorresponding ,P+@@D and the P-S@D retransmission for the same transport block is by SPS @"BT1.
Table 8-5: PD< a! P&S< o!f"#$re b SPS -RT/
Tra!s*"ss"o!
*oe D/ for*a% Sear S,ae
Tra!s*"ss"o! se*e of P&S<
orres,o!"!# %o PD<
ode 1 ($ format -ommon and
+, specific by %R7!$Sin"le%antenna port6 port 1- 0see subclause .-.1
ode 2 ($ format -ommon and
+, specific by %R7!$Sin"le%antenna port6 port 1- 0see subclause .-.1
Table 8-5: =PD< a! P&S< o!f"#$re b SPS -RT/
Tra!s*"ss"o! *oe
D/ for*a% Sear S,aeTra!s*"ss"o! se*e of P&S<
orres,o!"!# %o PD<
ode 1 ($ format - +, specific by %R7!$ Sin"le%antenna port6 port 1- 0see subclause .-.1
ode 2 ($ format - +, specific by %R7!$ Sin"le%antenna port6 port 1- 0see subclause .-.1
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+@@Ds with the @@ scrambled by the Temporary @"BT1regardless of whether -, is configured or not configured to decode P+@@Ds with the @@ scrambled by the @"BT1!the -, shall decode the P+@@D according to the combination defined in Table ?"9 and transmit the correspondingP-S@D. The scrambling initiali&ation of P-S@D corresponding to these P+@@D is by Temporary @"BT1.
1f a Temporary @"BT1 is set by higher layers! the scrambling of P-S@D corresponding to the andom /ccess
esponse Grant in subclause 9. and the P-S@D retransmission for the same transport block is by Temporary @"BT1.,lse! the scrambling of P-S@D corresponding to the andom /ccess esponse Grant in subclause 9. and the P-S@Dretransmission for the same transport block is by @"BT1.
Table 8-6: PD< o!f"#$re b Te*,orar -RT/
D/ for*a% Sear S,ae($ format - ommon
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+@@Ds with the @@ scrambled by the TP@"P-@@D"BT1! the -,shall decode the P+@@D according to the combination defined in table ?"=. The notation 3F3/ implies that the -, shall
receie either +@1 format 3 or +@1 format 3/ depending on the configuration.
Table 8-7: PD< o!f"#$re b TP-P&<-RT/
D/ for*a% Sear S,ae($ format 3'3A ommon
1f a -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+@@Ds with the @@ scrambled by the TP@"P-S@D"BT1! the -,shall decode the P+@@D according to the combination defined in table ?.?. The notation 3F3/ implies that the -, shallreceie either +@1 format 3 or +@1 format 3/ depending on the configuration.
Table 8-8: PD< o!f"#$re b TP-P&S<-RT/
D/ for*a% Sear S,ae($ format 3'3A ommon
.-.1 Sin"le%antenna port scheme
*or the single"antenna port transmission schemes (port '6) of the P-S@D! the -, transmission on the P-S@D is performed according to subclause 7.3./.' of 34.
.-.2 losed%loop spatial multiple=in" scheme
*or the closed"loop spatial multiple%ing transmission scheme of the P-S@D! the -, transmission on the P-S@D is
performed according to the applicable number of transmission layers as defined in subclause 7.3./. of 34.
.1 Resource allocation for *(;',*(; with uplin# ($format
Two resource allocation schemes Type 6 and Type ' are supported for P+@@DF,P+@@D with uplink +@1 format.
1f the resource allocation type bit is not present in the uplink +@1 format! only resource allocation type 6 is supported.
1f the resource allocation type bit is present in the uplink +@1 format! the selected resource allocation type for a decodedP+@@DF,P+@@D is indicated by a resource allocation type bit where type 6 is indicated by 6 alue and type ' isindicated otherwise. The -, shall interpret the resource allocation field depending on the resource allocation type bit in
the P+@@DF,P+@@D with uplink +@1 format detected.
.1.1 +plin# resource allocation type -
The resource allocation information for uplink resource allocation type 6 indicates to a scheduled -, a set of
contiguously allocated irtual resource block indices denoted by $>n . / resource allocation field in the scheduling
grant consists of a resource indication alue ( R0> ) corresponding to a starting resource block ( ST/T R/ ) and a length in
terms of contiguously allocated resource blocks ( @>s L ≥ '). The resource indication alue is defined by
if F)'( -:>@>s N L ≤− then
ST/T@>s-:> )'( R/ L N R0> +−=
else
)'()'( ST/T-:>@>s
-:>
-:> R/ N L N N R0> −−++−=
.1.2 +plin# resource allocation type 1
The resource allocation information for uplink resource allocation type ' indicates to a scheduled -, two sets ofresource blocks with each set including one or more consecutie resource block groups of si&e as gien in table
=.'.9.'"' assuming -:> N as the system bandwidth. / combinatorial inde% r consists of
+<
'Flog
N !L R/ bits.
The bits from the resource allocation field in the scheduling grant represent r unless the number of bits in the resourceallocation field in the scheduling grant is
" smaller than re0uired to fully represent r ! in which case the bits in the resource allocation field in the schedulinggrant occupy the :S>s of r and the alue of the remaining bits of r shall be assumed to be 6 or
" larger than re0uired to fully represent r ! in which case r occupies the :S>s of the resource allocation field in thescheduling grant.
The combinatorial inde% r corresponds to a starting and ending >G inde% of resource block set '! 6 s and '' − s ! and
resource block set ! s and '3 − s respectiely! where r is gien by e0uation'
6
) i
i
N sr
) i
−
=
−=
−∑ defined in subclause
=..' with ) I< and 'F-:> += N N . subclause =..' also defines ordering properties and range of alues that i s
(>G indices) map to. Mnly a single >G is allocated for a set at the starting >G inde% if the corresponding ending
/ -, shall transmit Sounding eference Symbol (SS) on per sering cell SS resources based on two trigger types#
" trigger type 6# higher layer signalling
" trigger type '# +@1 formats 6F<F'/ for *++ and T++ and +@1 formats >F@F+ for T++.
1n case both trigger type 6 and trigger type ' SS transmissions would occur in the same subframe in the same seringcell! the -, shall only transmit the trigger type ' SS transmission.
/ -, may be configured with SS parameters for trigger type 6 and trigger type ' on each sering cell. The followingSS parameters are sering cell specific and semi"statically configurable by higher layers for trigger type 6 and fortrigger type '.
• Transmission comb TC " ! as defined in subclause 7.7.3. of 34 for trigger type 6 and each configuration of
trigger type '
• Starting physical resource block assignment RRC n ! as defined in subclause 7.7.3. of 34 for trigger type 6 andeach configuration of trigger type '
• duration# single or indefinite (until disabled)! as defined in ''4 for trigger type 6
• srs#Confi0nde& 1SS for SS periodicity SST and SS subframe offset offset T ! as defined in Table ?."' and
Table ?." for trigger type 6 and SS periodicity SS!'T and SS subframe offset '!offset T ! as defined in Table
?."< and Table ?."7 trigger type '
• SS bandwidth *R* / ! as defined in subclause 7.7.3. of 34 for trigger type 6 and each configuration of
trigger type '
• *re0uency hopping bandwidth! hop+ ! as defined in subclause 7.7.3. of 34 for trigger type 6
• @yclic shiftcs
*R* n ! as defined in subclause 7.7.3.' of 34 for trigger type 6 and each configuration of trigger
type '
• Bumber of antenna ports p N for trigger type 6 and each configuration of trigger type '
*or trigger type ' and +@1 format < three sets of SS parameters! srs#ConfiApDC0#3ormat@! are configured by higherlayer signalling. The "bit SS re0uest field <4 in +@1 format < indicates the SS parameter set gien in Table ?.'"'.*or trigger type ' and +@1 format 6! a single set of SS parameters! srs#ConfiApDC0#3ormat'! is configured byhigher layer signalling. *or trigger type ' and +@1 formats '/F>F@F+! a single common set of SS parameters! srs#
ConfiApDC0#3ormat$a%%c! is configured by higher layer signalling. The SS re0uest field is ' bit <4 for +@1
formats 6F'/F>F@F+! with a type ' SS triggered if the alue of the SS re0uest field is set to K'K./ '"bit SS re0uest field shall be included in +@1 formats 6F'/ for frame structure type ' and 6F'/F>F@F+ forframe structure type if the -, is configured with SS parameters for +@1 formats 6F'/F>F@F+ by higher"layersignalling.
The sering cell specific SS transmission sub"frames are configured by higher layers. The allowable alues are gienin subclause 7.7.3.3 of 34.
*or a T++ sering cell! SS transmissions can occur in -pPTS and uplink subframes of the -:F+: configurationindicated by the higher layer parameter suframeAssinment for the sering cell.
hen closed"loop -, transmit antenna selection is enabled for a gien sering cell for a -, that supports transmit
antenna selection! the inde% ( )*R* na ! of the -, antenna that transmits the SS at time n*R* is gien by
( ) mod*R* *R* nna = ! for both partial and full sounding bandwidth! and when fre0uency hopping is disabled (i.e.!
*R* hop /+ ≥ )!
( )
oddis when mod
eenis whenmodFF)(
⋅++
= 2 n
2 2 nnnna
*R*
*R* *R* *R* *R*
β ,
otherwise 6
6<mod where'
=
= 2
β
when fre0uency hopping is enabled (i.e.! *R* hop /+ < )!
where alues /SS! hop! N b! and nSS are gien in subclause 7.7.3. of 34! and ∏==
*R*
hop
/
++
+ N 2 K
K (where '=hop+ N
regardless of the + N alue)! e%cept when a single SS transmission is configured for the -,. 1f a -, is configured
with more than one sering cell! the -, is not e%pected to transmit SS on different antenna ports simultaneously.
/ -, may be configured to transmit SS on p N antenna ports of a sering cell where p N may be configured by
higher layer signalling. *or P-S@D transmission mode ' U<!!'!6∈ p N and for P-S@D transmission mode
U!'!6∈ p N with two antenna ports configured for P-S@D and U<!'!6∈ p N with < antenna ports configured for
P-S@D. / -, configured for SS transmission on multiple antenna ports of a sering cell shall transmit SS for all the
configured transmit antenna ports within one S@"*+2/ symbol of the same subframe of the sering cell.The SS transmission bandwidth and starting physical resource block assignment are the same for all the configuredantenna ports of a gien sering cell.
/ -, not configured with multiple T/Gs shall not transmit SS in a symbol wheneer SS and P-S@D transmissionshappen to oerlap in the same symbol.
*or T++ sering cell! when one S@"*+2/ symbol e%ists in -pPTS of the gien sering cell! it can be used for SStransmission. hen two S@"*+2/ symbols e%ist in -pPTS of the gien sering cell! both can be used for SStransmission and for trigger type 6 SS both can be assigned to the same -,.
1f a -, is not configured with multiple T/Gs! or if a -, is configured with multiple T/Gs and SS and P-@@Dformat FaFb happen to coincide in the same subframe in the same sering cell!
" The -, shall not transmit type 6 triggered SS wheneer type 6 triggered SS and P-@@D format FaFbtransmissions happen to coincide in the same subframe
" The -, shall not transmit type ' triggered SS wheneer type ' triggered SS and P-@@D format aFb orformat with D/E"/@C transmissions happen to coincide in the same subframe
" The -, shall not transmit P-@@D format without D/E"/@C wheneer type ' triggered SS and P-@@Dformat without D/E"/@C transmissions happen to coincide in the same subframe.
1f a -, is not configured with multiple T/Gs! or if a -, is configured with multiple T/Gs and SS and P-@@Dhappen to coincide in the same subframe in the same sering cell!
" The -, shall not transmit SS wheneer SS transmission and P-@@D transmission carrying D/E"/@C
andFor positie S happen to coincide in the same subframe if the parameter ac"Nac"*R*#*imultaneousTransmission is 3AL*
" *or *++"T++ and primary cell frame structure '! the -, shall not transmit SS in a symbol wheneer SStransmission and P-@@D transmission carrying D/E"/@C andFor positie S using shortened format asdefined in subclauses 7.<.' and 7.<./ of 34 happen to oerlap in the same symbol if the parameter
ac"Nac"*R*#*imultaneousTransmission is TR!.
" -nless otherwise prohibited! the -, shall transmit SS wheneer SS transmission and P-@@D transmission
carrying D/E"/@C andFor positie S using shortened format as defined in subclauses 7.<.' and 7.<./ of 34happen to coincide in the same subframe if the parameter ac"Nac"*R*#*imultaneousTransmission is TR! .
/ -, not configured with multiple T/Gs shall not transmit SS wheneer SS transmission on any sering cells andP-@@D transmission carrying D/E"/@C andFor positie S using normal P-@@D format as defined in subclauses7.<.' and 7.<./ of 34 happen to coincide in the same subframe.
1n -pPTS! wheneer SS transmission instance oerlaps with the P/@D region for preamble format < or e%ceeds therange of uplink system bandwidth configured in the sering cell! the -, shall not transmit SS.
The parameter ac"Nac"*R*#*imultaneousTransmission proided by higher layers determines if a -, is configured tosupport the transmission of D/E"/@C on P-@@D and SS in one subframe. 1f it is configured to support thetransmission of D/E"/@C on P-@@D and SS in one subframe! then in the cell specific SS subframes of the primary cell -, shall transmit D/E"/@C and S using the shortened P-@@D format as defined in subclauses 7.<.'
and 7.<./ of 34! where the D/E"/@C or the S symbol corresponding to the SS location is punctured.This shortened P-@@D format shall be used in a cell specific SS subframe of the primary cell een if the -, does nottransmit SS in that subframe. The cell specific SS subframes are defined in subclause 7.7.3.3 of 34. Mtherwise! the-, shall use the normal P-@@D format 'F'aF'b as defined in subclause 7.<.' of 34 or normal P-@@D format 3 asdefined in subclause 7.<./ of 34 for the transmission of D/E"/@C and S.
Trigger type 6 SS configuration of a -, in a sering cell for SS periodicity! SST ! and SS subframe offset! offset T ! is
defined in Table ?."' and Table ?."! for *++ and T++ sering cell! respectiely. The periodicity SST of the SS
transmission is sering cell specific and is selected from the set ! 7! '6! 6! <6! ?6! '96! 36U ms or subframes.
*or the SS periodicity SST of ms in T++ sering cell! two SS resources are configured in a half frame containing
-: subframe(s) of the gien sering cell.
Type 6 triggered SS transmission instances in a gien sering cell for T++ sering cell with SS >T and for *++sering cell are the subframes satisfying 6mod)'6( SSSS =−+⋅ T T " n offset f ! where for *++ { }5!...!'!6SS =" is the
subframe inde% within the frame! for T++ sering cell SS" is defined in Table ?."3. The SS transmission instances
for T++ sering cell with SS =T are the subframes satisfying 67mod)( SS =− offset T " .
*or T++ sering cell! and a -, configured for type 6 triggered SS transmission in sering cell c! and the -,configured with the parameter 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for sering cell c! if the -, does not detect an -:F+:configuration indication for radio frame m (as described in section '3.')! the -, shall not transmit trigger type 6 SS ina subframe of radio frame m that is indicated by the parameter eimta#-AR5#ReferenceConfi#r$% as a downlinksubframe unless the -, transmits P-S@D in the same subframe.
Trigger type ' SS configuration of a -, in a sering cell for SS periodicity! SS!'T ! and SS subframe offset! '!offset T !
is defined in Table ?."< and Table ?."7! for *++ and T++ sering cell! respectiely. The periodicity SS!'T of the SS
transmission is sering cell specific and is selected from the set ! 7! '6U ms or subframes.
*or the SS periodicity SS!'T of ms in T++ sering cell! two SS resources are configured in a half frame
containing -: subframe(s) of the gien sering cell.
/ -, configured for type ' triggered SS transmission in sering cell c and not configured with a carrier indicator fieldshall transmit SS on sering cell c upon detection of a positie SS re0uest in P+@@DF,P+@@D schedulingP-S@DFP+S@D on sering cell c.
/ -, configured for type ' triggered SS transmission in sering cell c and configured with a carrier indicator field
shall transmit SS on sering cell c upon detection of a positie SS re0uest in P+@@DF,P+@@D schedulingP-S@DFP+S@D with the alue of carrier indicator field corresponding to sering cell c.
/ -, configured for type ' triggered SS transmission on sering cell c upon detection of a positie SS re0uest in
subframe n of sering cell c shall commence SS transmission in the first subframe satisfying <! ≥+ " " n and
6mod)'6( SS!''!SS =−+⋅ T T " n offset f for T++ sering cell c with SS!' >T and for *++ sering cell c!
67mod)( '!SS =− offset T " for T++ sering cell c with SS!' =T
where for *++ sering cell c { }5!...!'!6SS =" is the subframe inde% within the frame f n ! for T++ sering cell c SS"
is defined in Table ?."3./ -, configured for type ' triggered SS transmission is not e%pected to receie type ' SS triggering eents
associated with different alues of trigger type ' SS transmission parameters! as configured by higher layer signalling!for the same subframe and the same sering cell.
*or T++ sering cell c! and a -, configured with 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for a sering cell c! the -, shallnot transmit SS in a subframe of a radio frame that is indicated by the corresponding e12T/"-:F+:"configuration asa downlink subframe.
/ -, shall not transmit SS wheneer SS and a P-S@D transmission corresponding to a andom /ccess esponseGrant or a retransmission of the same transport block as part of the contention based random access procedure coincidein the same subframe.
*or *++! and sering cell with frame structure type '! an D/E"/@C receied on the PD1@D assigned to a -, insubframe i is associated with the P-S@D transmission in subframe i"<.
*or *++"T++! and sering cell with frame structure type '! and -, not configured to monitor P+@@DF,P+@@D inanother sering cell with frame structure type for scheduling the sering cell! an D/E"/@C receied on the PD1@Dassigned to a -, in subframe i is associated with the P-S@D transmission in subframe i"<.
*or *++"T++! if a sering cell is a secondary cell with frame structure type ' and if the -, is configured to monitorP+@@DF,P+@@D in another sering cell with frame structure type for scheduling the sering cell! then an D/E"/@C receied on the PD1@D assigned to a -, in subframe i is associated with P-S@D transmission on the sering cell
in subframe i"9.
*or T++! if the -, is not configured with 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for any sering cell and! if a -, isconfigured with one sering cell! or if the -, is configured with more than one sering cell and the T++ -:F+:configuration of all the configured sering cells is the same!
" *or frame structure type -:F+: configuration '"9! an D/E"/@C receied on the PD1@D assigned to a -,
in subframe i is associated with the P-S@D transmission in the subframe i#" as indicated by the following Table?.3"'.
" *or frame structure type -:F+: configuration 6! an D/E"/@C receied on the PD1@D in the resource
corresponding to 6 -0C- 0 = ! as defined in subclause 5.'.! assigned to a -, in subframe i is associated with the
P-S@D transmission in the subframe i#" as indicated by the following Table ?.3"'. *or frame structure type
-:F+: configuration 6! an D/E"/@C receied on the PD1@D in the resource corresponding to ' -0C- 0 = ! as
defined in subclause 5.'.! assigned to a -, in subframe i is associated with the P-S@D transmission in thesubframe i#9.
*or T++! if a -, is configured with more than one sering cell and the T++ -:F+: configuration of at least twoconfigured sering cells is not the same! or if the -, is configured with 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for at leastone sering cell! or *++"T++ and sering cell is frame structure type !
" *or sering cell with an -:"reference -:F+: configuration (defined in subclause ?.6) belonging to'!!3!<!7!9U! an D/E"/@C receied on the PD1@D assigned to a -, in subframe i is associated with the
P-S@D transmission in the subframe i#" for the sering cell as indicated by the following Table ?.3"'! where8T++ -:F+: @onfiguration8 in Table ?.3"' refers to the -:"reference -:F+: @onfiguration.
" *or a sering cell with -:"reference -:F+: configuration 6 (defined in subclause ?.6)! an D/E"/@C
receied on the PD1@D in the resource corresponding to 6 -0C- 0 = ! as defined in subclause 5.'.! assigned to a
-, in subframe i is associated with the P-S@D transmission in the subframe i#" for the sering cell as indicated by the following Table ?.3"'! where 8T++ -:F+: @onfiguration8 in Table ?.3"' refers to the -:"reference-:F+: configuration. *or a sering cell with -:"reference -:F+: configuration 6! an D/E"/@C receied on
the PD1@D in the resource corresponding to ' -0C- 0 = ! as defined in subclause 5.'.! assigned to a -, in
subframe i is associated with the P-S@D transmission in the subframe i#9 for the sering cell.
" *or *++"T++! if a sering cell is a secondary cell with -:"reference -:F+: configuration 6 and if the -, is
configured to monitor P+@@DF,P+@@D in another sering cell with frame structure type ' for scheduling thesering cell! for downlink subframe i! if a transport block was transmitted in the associated P-S@D subframe i#9for the sering cell then PD1@D resource corresponding to that transport block is not present in subframe i.
The physical layer in the -, shall delier indications to the higher layers as follows#
*or *++! and for T++ with a -, configured with one sering cell! and for T++ with a -, configured with more thanone sering cell and with T++ -:F+: configuration of all configured sering cells the same! and -, is not configuredwith 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for any sering cell! for downlink or special subframe i! if a transport block was
transmitted in the associated P-S@D subframe then#
if /@C is decoded on the PD1@D corresponding to that transport block in subframe i! or if that transport block is
disabled by P+@@DF,P+@@D receied in downlink or special subframe i! /@C for that transport block shall bedeliered to the higher layers else B/@C for that transport block shall be deliered to the higher layers.
*or T++! if the -, is configured with more than one sering cell! and if at least two sering cells hae different -:F+:configurations! or the -, is configured with 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for at least one sering cell! or for *++"T++! for downlink or special subframe i! if a transport block was transmitted in the associated P-S@D subframe then#
if /@C is decoded on the PD1@D corresponding to that transport block in subframe i! or if that transport block isdisabled by P+@@DF,P+@@D receied in downlink or special subframe i! /@C for that transport block shall bedeliered to the higher layers or
if a PD1@D resource corresponding to that transport block is not present in subframe i or if -, is not e%pected toreceie PD1@D corresponding to that transport block in subframe i! /@C for that transport block shall bedeliered to the higher layers.
else B/@C for that transport block shall be deliered to the higher layers.
The -, shall perform P-S@D fre0uency hopping if the single bit *re0uency Dopping (*D) field in a correspondingP+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6 is set to ' and the uplink resource block assignment is type 6 otherwise noP-S@D fre0uency hopping is performed.
/ -, performing P-S@D fre0uency hopping shall determine its P-S@D esource /llocation (/) for the first slot of
a subframe (*$) including the lowest inde% P> ( )('
nn* R/ ) in subframe n from the resource allocation field in the latest
P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6 for the same transport block. 1f there is no P+@@DF,P+@@D for the sametransport block! the -, shall determine its hopping type based on
- the hopping information in the most recent semi"persistent scheduling assignment P+@@DF,P+@@D! whenthe initial P-S@D for the same transport block is semi"persistently scheduled or
- the random access response grant for the same transport block! when the P-S@D is initiated by the randomaccess response grant.
The resource allocation field in +@1 format 6 e%cludes either ' or bits used for hopping information as indicated by
Table ?.<"' below where the number of P-S@D resource blocks is defined as
( )
>−
=
−−
=
hoppingP-S@D' BTypeQ
hoppingP-S@D' BType
hoppingP-S@D'TypemodQ
sb
sb
-4
R/
!L
R/
!L
R/
!L
R/
-4
R/
!L
R/
!*C-
R/
N N
N
N N N
N
*or type ' and type P-S@D hopping! 'Q DM
>DM> += N N if DM
> N is an odd number where DM
> N defined in 34.
DM>
DM>
Q N N = in other cases. The si&e of the resource allocation field in +@1 format 6 after e%cluding either ' or bits
shall be hop!L N N N = -:>
-:> )F)'((log −+= ! where N !L<hop I ' or bits. The number of contiguous >s
that can be assigned to a type"' hopping user is limited to
-:
>F N = . The number of contiguous >s that can be
assigned to a type" hopping user is limited to min
(-:
>F N = ! s+ N N F
P-S@D
>)! where the number of sub"bands
sb N is gien by higher layers.
/ -, performing P-S@D fre0uency hopping shall use one of two possible P-S@D fre0uency hopping types based onthe hopping information. P-S@D hopping type ' is described in subclause ?.<.' and type is described in subclause?.<..
Table 8.4-1: $*ber of <o,,"!# "%s &'Eo, s. Ss%e* a!"%
Ss%e* C
!L R/ N
H<o,,"!# b"%s for 2! slo% R(N UL_hop)
%4 1
)-%11- 2
The parameter -oppin#mode proided by higher layers determines if P-S@D fre0uency hopping is 8inter"subframe8or 8intra and inter"subframe8.
*or P-S@D hopping type ' the hopping bit or bits indicated in Table ?.<"' determine )(Q in R/ as defined in Table ?.<".
The lowest inde% P> ( '( )
* R/n i ) of the 'st slot / in subframe i is defined as ' ' DM
>( ) ( ) F * * R/ R/n i n i N = + %% ! where
'( )
* R/ *TART n i R/= ! and ST/T R/ is obtained from the uplink scheduling grant as in subclause ?.< and subclause ?.'.
The lowest inde% P> ( )(in R/ ) of the nd slot / in subframe i is defined asDM>( ) ( ) F R/ R/n i n i N = + %% .
The set of physical resource blocks to be used for P-S@D transmission are @>s L contiguously allocated resource
blocks from P> inde% '( )
* R/n i for the 'st slot! and from P> inde% )(in R/ for the nd slot! respectiely! where @>s L
is obtained from the uplink scheduling grant as in subclause ?.< and subclause ?.'.
1f the -oppin#mode is 8inter"subframe8! the 'st slot / is applied to een @-,BTTAB>! and the nd slot / isapplied to odd @-,BTTAB>! where @-,BTTAB> is defined in ?4.
.4.2 !ype 2 *+S; hoppin"
1n P-S@D hopping type the set of physical resource blocks to be used for transmission in slot sn is gien by thescheduling grant together with a predefined pattern according to 34 subclause 7.3.<.1f the system frame number is not ac0uired by the -, yet! the -, shall not transmit P-S@D with type" hopping and
1f -: se0uence"group hopping or se0uence hopping is configured in a sering cell! it applies to all eference Symbols(SS! P-S@D and P-@@D S). 1f disabling of the se0uence"group hopping and se0uence hopping is configured for the-, in the sering cell through the higher"layer parameter Disale#seuence#roup#hoppin ! the se0uence"group
hopping and se0uence hopping for P-S@D S are disabled.
. odulation order6 redundancy version and transport bloc#size determination
To determine the modulation order! redundancy ersion and transport block si&e for the physical uplink shared channel!
the -, shall firstO read the 8modulation and coding scheme and redundancy ersion8 field ( 2@S 0 )! and
O check the 8@S1 re0uest8 bit field! and
O compute the total number of allocated P>s ( P> N ) based on the procedure defined in subclause ?.'! and
O compute the number of coded symbols for control information.
..1 odulation order and redundancy version determination
*or ?6 2@S ≤≤ 0 ! the modulation order ( m5 ) is determined as follows#
" 1f the -, is capable of supporting 9<E/2 in P-S@D and has not been configured by higher layers to transmitonly EPSC and '9E/2! the modulation order is gien by K
m5 in Table ?.9.'"'.
" 1f the -, is not capable of supporting 9<E/2 in P-S@D or has been configured by higher layers to transmit
only EPSC and '9E/2! K
m5 is first read from Table ?.9.'"'. The modulation order is set to )!<min( K
mm 55 = .
" 1f the parameter tti/undlin proided by higher layers is set to TR! ! then the modulation order is set to
=m5 . esource allocation si&e is restricted to 3P> ≤ N applies in this case if the -, does not indicate
support by higher layers to operate without it.
*or 3'5 2@S ≤≤ 0 the modulation order ( m5 ) is determined as follows#
" if +@1 format 6 is used and 52@S = 0 or! if +@1 format < is used and only ' T> is enabled and 52@S = 0 for the
enabled T> and the signalled number of transmission layers is '! and if
" the 8@S1 re0uest8 bit field is ' bit and the bit is set to trigger an aperiodic report and! <P> ≤ N or!
" the 8@S1 re0uest8 bit field is bits and is triggering an aperiodic @S1 report for one sering cell according to
Table =..'"'/! and! <P> ≤ N or!
" the 8@S1 re0uest8 bit field is bits and is triggering an aperiodic @S1 report for more than one sering cell
according to Table =..'"'/ and! 6P> ≤ N ! or!
" the 8@S1 re0uest8 bit field is bits and is triggering an aperiodic @S1 report for one @S1 process according to
Table =..'"'> and <P> ≤ N ! or!
" the 8@S1 re0uest8 bit field is bits and is triggering an aperiodic @S1 report for more than one @S1 process
according to Table =..'"'> and 6P> ≤ N !
then the modulation order is set to =m5 .
" Mtherwise! the modulation order shall be determined from the +@1 transported in the latest P+@@DF,P+@@D
with +@1 format 6F< for the same transport block using ?6 2@S ≤≤ 0 . 1f there is no P+@@DF,P+@@D with
+@1 format 6F< for the same transport block using ?62@S
≤≤ 0 ! the modulation order shall be determined from
" the most recent semi"persistent scheduling assignment P+@@DF,P+@@D! when the initial P-S@D for thesame transport block is semi"persistently scheduled! or!
*or ?6 2@S ≤≤ 0 ! the -, shall first determine the T>S inde% ( T>S 0 ) using 2@S 0 and Table ?.9.'"' e%cept if thetransport block is disabled in +@1 format < as specified below. *or a transport block that is not mapped to two"layerspatial multiple%ing! the T>S is determined by the procedure in subclause =.'.=..'. *or a transport block that ismapped to two"layer spatial multiple%ing! the T>S is determined by the procedure in subclause =.'=...
*or 3'5 2@S ≤≤ 0 !
" if +@1 format 6 is used and 52@S = 0 or! if +@1 format < is used and only ' T> is enabled and 5
2@S = 0 for
the enabled T> and the number of transmission layers is '! and if
" the 8@S1 re0uest8 bit field is ' bit and is set to trigger an aperiodic @S1 report and <P> ≤ N ! or
" the 8@S1 re0uest8 bit field is bits and is triggering an aperiodic @S1 report for one sering cell according to
" the 8@S1 re0uest8 bit field is bits and is triggering aperiodic @S1 report for more than one sering cell
according to Table =..'"'/ and! 6P> ≤ N ! or!
" the 8@S1 re0uest8 bit field is bits and is triggering an aperiodic @S1 report for one @S1 process according to
Table =..'"'> and <P> ≤ N ! or!
" the 8@S1 re0uest8 bit field is bits and is triggering an aperiodic @S1 report for more than one @S1 process
according to Table =..'"'> and! 6P> ≤ N
then there is no transport block for the -:"S@D and only the control information feedback for the current P-S@Dreporting mode is transmitted by the -,.
" Mtherwise! the transport block si&e shall be determined from the initial P+@@DF,P+@@D for the same transport
block using ?6 2@S ≤≤ 0 . 1f there is no initial P+@@DF,P+@@D with an uplink +@1 format for the same
transport block using ?6 2@S ≤≤ 0 ! the transport block si&e shall be determined from
" the most recent semi"persistent scheduling assignment P+@@DF,P+@@D! when the initial P-S@D for the
same transport block is semi"persistently scheduled! or!
" the random access response grant for the same transport block! when the P-S@D is initiated by the randomaccess response grant.
1n +@1 format < a transport block is disabled if either the combination of 62@S = 0 and 'P> > N or the combination of
?2@S = 0 and 'P> = N is signalled! otherwise the transport block is enabled.
Mffset alues are defined for single codeword P-S@D transmission and multiple codeword P-S@D transmission.
Single codeword P-S@D transmission offsets AC2 -AR5
offset
−β ! R0
offset β andC50
offset β shall be configured to alues according
to Table ?.9.3"'!!3 with the higher layer signalled inde%es
AC2 -AR5
offset 0
−
!
R0
offset 0 ! and
C50
offset 0 ! respectiely. 2ultiple
codeword P-S@D transmission offsets AC2 -AR5
offset
−β ! R0
offset β andC50
offset β shall be configured to alues according to
Table ?.9.3"'!!3 with the higher layer signalled inde%es AC2 -AR5
)C offset 0 −! !
R0
)C offset 0 ! andC50
)C offset 0 ! ! respectiely.
1f the -, is configured with higher layer parameter !plin"owerControlDedicated#v$%&' for sering cell c ! and if asubframe belongs to uplink power control subframe set as indicated by the higher layer parameter tpc#*uframe*et#
r$%! then for that subframe! the -, shall use
" the higher layer inde%es AC2 -AR5
set%offset, 0
−!
R0
set offset 0 ! andC50
set offset 0 ! in place of AC2 -AR5
offset 0 −!
R0
offset 0 ! andC50
offset 0
respectiely in Tables ?.9.3"'!!3! to determine AC2 -AR5
offset
−β ! R0
offset β andC50
offset β respectiely for single
codeword P-S@D transmissions! and
" the higher layer inde%es AC2 -AR5
set% )C,offset, 0 −
! R0
set )C offset 0 !! andC50
set )C offset 0 !! in place of AC2 -AR5
)C offset 0 −! !
R0
)C offset 0 ! and
C50
)C offset 0 ! respectiely in Tables ?.9.3"'!!3! to determine AC2 -AR5
offset
−β ! R0
offset β andC50
offset β respectiely for
multiple codeword P-S@D transmissions.
Table 8.6.3-1: +a,,"!# of <R@-N offse% al$es a! %e "!e> s"#!alle b "#er laers
-, transmit antenna selection is configured by higher layers ia parameter ue#TransmitAntenna*election.
/ -, configured with transmit antenna selection for a sering cell is not e%pected to
• be configured with more than one antenna port for any uplink physical channel or signal for any configured
sering cell! or
• be configured with trigger type ' SS transmission on any configured sering cell! or
• be configured with simultaneous P-@@D and P-S@D transmission! or
• be configured with demodulation reference signal for P-S@D with M@@ for any configured sering cell (see
34! subclause 7.7..'.')! or
• receie +@1 *ormat 6 indicating uplink resource allocation type ' for any sering cell! or
• be configured with a S@G.
1f -, transmit antenna selection is disabled or not supported by the -,! the -, shall transmit from -, port 6.
1f closed"loop -, transmit antenna selection is enabled by higher layers the -, shall perform transmit antenna selectionfor P-S@D in response to the most recent command receied ia +@1 *ormat 6 in subclause 7.3.3. of <4.
1f a -, is configured with more than one sering cell! the -, may assume the same transmit antenna port alue isindicated in each P+@@DF,P+@@D with +@1 format 6 in a gien subframe.
1f open"loop -, transmit antenna selection is enabled by higher layers! the transmit antenna for P-S@DFSS to beselected by the -, is not specified.
*hysical downlin# control channel procedures
1f the -, is configured with a S@G! the -, shall apply the procedures described in this clause for both 2@G and S@G
" hen the procedures are applied for 2@G! the terms Nsecondary cellO! Nsecondary cellsO ! Nsering cellO! NseringcellsO in this clause refer to secondary cell! secondary cells! sering cell! sering cells belonging to the 2@Grespectiely.
" hen the procedures are applied for S@G! the terms Nsecondary cellO! Nsecondary cellsO! Nsering cellO! NseringcellsO in this clause refer to secondary cell! secondary cells (not including PS@ell)! sering cell! sering cells belonging to the S@G respectiely. The term Nprimary cellO in this clause refers to the PS@ell of the S@G.
.1 +, procedure for determinin" physical downlin# controlchannel assi"nment
.1.1 *(; assi"nment procedure
The control region of each sering cell consists of a set of @@,s! numbered from 6 to '!@@, −" N according to
subclause 9.?.' in 34! where " N !@@, is the total number of @@,s in the control region of subframe " .
The -, shall monitor a set of P+@@D candidates on one or more actiated sering cells as configured by higher layersignalling for control information! where monitoring implies attempting to decode each of the P+@@Ds in the setaccording to all the monitored +@1 formats.
The set of P+@@D candidates to monitor are defined in terms of search spaces! where a search space)( L
" * at
aggregation leel { }?!<!!'∈ L is defined by a set of P+@@D candidates. *or each sering cell on which P+@@D is
monitored! the @@,s corresponding to P+@@D candidate m of the search space )( L" * are gien by
where " H is defined below! 6! ! 'i L= −L . *or the common search space mm =′ . *or the P+@@D -, specific search
space! for the sering cell on which P+@@D is monitored! if the monitoring -, is configured with carrier indicator field
then C0 L n ) mm ⋅+=′ )( where C0 n is the carrier indicator field alue! else if the monitoring -, is not configured with
carrier indicator field then mm =′ ! where ( )6! ! '
Lm ) = −L . )( L ) is the number of P+@@D candidates to monitor in
the gien search space.
Bote that the carrier indicator field alue is the same as *ervCell0nde& gien in ''4.
The -, shall monitor one common search space in eery non"+A subframe at each of the aggregation leels < and ?
on the primary cell.
/ -, shall monitor common search space on a cell to decode the P+@@Ds necessary to receie 2>2S on that cellwhen configured by higher layers.
1f a -, is not configured for ,P+@@D monitoring! and if the -, is not configured with a carrier indicator field! then
the -, shall monitor one P+@@D -,"specific search space at each of the aggregation leels '! ! <! ? on each actiatedsering cell in eery non"+A subframe.
1f a -, is not configured for ,P+@@D monitoring! and if the -, is configured with a carrier indicator field! then the
-, shall monitor one or more -,"specific search spaces at each of the aggregation leels '! ! <! ? on one or moreactiated sering cells as configured by higher layer signalling in eery non"+A subframe.
1f a -, is configured for ,P+@@D monitoring on a sering cell! and if that sering cell is actiated! and if the -, is notconfigured with a carrier indicator field! then the -, shall monitor one P+@@D -,"specific search space at each of theaggregation leels '! ! <! ? on that sering cell in all non"+A subframes where ,P+@@D is not monitored on thatsering cell.
1f a -, is configured for ,P+@@D monitoring on a sering cell! and if that sering cell is actiated! and if the -, isconfigured with a carrier indicator field! then the -, shall monitor one or more P+@@D -,"specific search spaces ateach of the aggregation leels '! ! <! ? on that sering cell as configured by higher layer signalling in all non"+Asubframes where ,P+@@D is not monitored on that sering cell.
The common and P+@@D -,"specific search spaces on the primary cell may oerlap.
/ -, configured with the carrier indicator field associated with monitoring P+@@D on sering cell c shall monitorP+@@D configured with carrier indicator field and with @@ scrambled by @"BT1 in the P+@@D -, specific searchspace of sering cell c.
/ -, configured with the carrier indicator field associated with monitoring P+@@D on the primary cell shall monitorP+@@D configured with carrier indicator field and with @@ scrambled by SPS @"BT1 in the P+@@D -, specificsearch space of the primary cell.
The -, shall monitor the common search space for P+@@D without carrier indicator field.
*or the sering cell on which P+@@D is monitored! if the -, is not configured with a carrier indicator field! it shallmonitor the P+@@D -, specific search space for P+@@D without carrier indicator field! if the -, is configured with a
carrier indicator field it shall monitor the P+@@D -, specific search space for P+@@D with carrier indicator field.
/ -, is not e%pected to monitor the P+@@D of a secondary cell if it is configured to monitor P+@@D with carrierindicator field corresponding to that secondary cell in another sering cell. *or the sering cell on which P+@@D ismonitored! the -, shall monitor P+@@D candidates at least for the same sering cell.
/ -, configured to monitor P+@@D candidates with @@ scrambled by @"BT1 or SPS @"BT1 with a common
payload si&e and with the same first @@, inde% @@,n (as described in subclause '6.') but with different sets of +@1
information fields as defined in <4 in the
- common search space
- P+@@D -, specific search space
on the primary cell shall assume that for the P+@@D candidates with @@ scrambled by @"BT1 or SPS @"BT1!
- if the -, is configured with the carrier indicator field associated with monitoring the P+@@D on the primary cell! only the P+@@D in the common search space is transmitted by the primary cell
- otherwise! only the P+@@D in the -, specific search space is transmitted by the primary cell.
/ -, configured to monitor P+@@D candidates in a gien sering cell with a gien +@1 format si&e with @1*! and
@@ scrambled by @" BT1! where the P+@@D candidates may hae one or more possible alues of @1* for the gien+@1 format si&e! shall assume that a P+@@D candidate with the gien +@1 format si&e may be transmitted in the giensering cell in any P+@@D -, specific search space corresponding to any of the possible alues of @1* for the gien
+@1 format si&e.
The aggregation leels defining the search spaces are listed in Table 5.'.'"'. The +@1 formats that the -, shall monitor
depend on the configured transmission mode per each sering cell as defined in subclause =.'.
Table 9.1.1-1: PD< a!"a%es *o!"%ore b a &=
Sear s,ae)( L
" * $*ber of PD<
a!"a%es )( L ) T,e ##re#a%"o! leel L S"Be "! =s
&=-s,e"f"
1
2 12
4 2
1 2
o**o!4 1 4
1 2
*or the common search spaces! " H is set to 6 for the two aggregation leels <= L and ?= L .
*or the -,"specific search space)( L
" * at aggregation leel L ! the ariable " H is defined by
( )' mod" " H A H D−= ×
where 6BT1' ≠=− nH ! 35?== A ! 9773== D and s " n= ! sn is the slot number within a radio frame.
The BT1 alue used for BT1n is defined in subclause =.' in downlink and subclause ? in uplink.
.1.2 *;$; assi"nment procedure
1f a -, is not configured with multiple T/Gs! or if a -, is configured with multiple T/Gs and P-S@D transmissionsscheduled from sering cell c in subframe n are not scheduled by a andom /ccess esponse Grant corresponding to a
random access preamble transmission for a secondary cell
" *or P-S@D transmissions scheduled from sering cell c in subframe n! the -, shall determine the
corresponding PD1@D resource of sering cell c in subframe -0C- n " + ! where
" -0C- " is always < for *++.
" -0C-
" is 9 for *++"T++ and sering cell c frame structure type and the P-S@D transmission is for
another sering cell with frame structure type '.
" -0C- " is < for *++"T++ and sering cell c frame structure type 'and the P-S@D transmission is for a
sering cell with frame structure type '.
" -0C- " is gien in table 5.'."' for *++"T++ and sering cell c frame structure type ' and the P-S@D
transmission is for another sering cell with frame structure type .
" *or T++! if the -, is not configured with 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for any sering cell and! if the -, isconfigured with one sering cell! or if the -, is configured with more than one sering cell and the T++ -:F+:configuration of all the configured sering cells is the same! for P-S@D transmissions scheduled from seringcell c in subframe n! the -, shall determine the corresponding PD1@D resource of sering cell c in subframe
-0C- n " + ! where -0C- " is gien in table 5.'."'.
" *or T++! if the -, is configured with more than one sering cell and the T++ -:F+: configuration of at leasttwo configured sering cells is not the same! or if the -, is configured with 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for
at least one sering cell ! or for *++"T++ and sering cell c frame structure type ! for P-S@D transmissionsscheduled from sering cell c in subframe n! the -, shall determine the corresponding PD1@D resource of
sering cell c in subframe -0C- n " + ! where -0C- " is gien in table 5.'."'! where the 8T++ -:F+:
@onfiguration8 in the rest of this subclause refers to the -:"reference -:F+: configuration (defined in subclause?.6) of the sering cell corresponding to the P-S@D transmission.
1f a -, is configured with multiple T/Gs! for P-S@D transmissions on subframe n for a secondary cell c scheduled bya andom /ccess esponse grant corresponding to a random access preamble transmission for the secondary cell c !
" *or T++! if the -, is configured with more than one sering cell and the T++ -:F+: configuration of at leasttwo configured sering cells is not the same! or if the -, is configured with 0)TA#)ainConfi*ervCell#r$% for at least one sering cell! or for *++"T++ and sering cell c frame structure type ! the 8T++ -:F+:@onfiguration8 in the rest of this subclause refers to the -:"reference -:F+: configuration (defined in subclause
?.6) of secondary cell c .
" 1f the -, is not configured to monitor P+@@DF,P+@@D with carrier indicator field corresponding to secondarycell c in another sering cell! the -, shall determine the corresponding PD1@D resource on the secondary cell
c in subframe -0C- n " + ! where
" -0C- " is always < for *++ and where -0C- " is gien in table 5.'."' for T++.
" -0C- " is < for *++"T++ and secondary cell c frame structure type '.
" -0C- " is gien in table 5.'."' for *++"T++ and secondary cell c frame structure type
" 1f the -, is configured to monitor P+@@DF,P+@@D with carrier indicator field corresponding to secondary cellc in another sering cell 'c ! the -, configured with multiple T/Gs shall determine the corresponding PD1@D
resource on the sering cell 'c in subframe -0C- n " + ! where
" -0C- " is always < for *++ and where -0C- " is gien in table 5.'."' for T++.
" -0C- " is < for *++"T++ and primary cell frame structure type ' and frame structure type ' for secondary
cell c and sering cell 'c
" -0C- "
is gien in table 5.'."' for *++"T++ and sering cell c frame structure type
" -0C- "
is 9 for *++"T++ and sering cell c frame structure type ' and sering cell 'c frame structure type
*or subframe bundling operation! the corresponding PD1@D resource is associated with the last subframe in the bundle.
Table 9.1.2-1: -0C- " for TDD
TDD &'D'o!f"#$ra%"o
!
s$bfra*e "!e> n
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
- 4 / 4 /
1 4 4
2
3
4
)
4 4 /
The PD1@D resource is identified by the inde% pair )!( se8
-0C-
.roup
-0C- nn where
.roup
-0C- n is the PD1@D group number and
se8 -0C- n is the orthogonal se0uence inde% within the group as defined by#
] D)R* n is mapped from the cyclic shift for +2S field (according to Table 5.'.") in the most recentP+@@D with uplink +@1 format <4 for the transport block(s) associated with the corresponding
P-S@D transmission. D)R* n shall be set to &ero! if there is no P+@@D with uplink +@1 format for
the same transport block! and
] if the initial P-S@D for the same transport block is semi"persistently scheduled! or
] if the initial P-S@D for the same transport block is scheduled by the random access response
grant .
] -0C- *3 N is the spreading factor si&e used for PD1@D modulation as described in subclause 9.5.' in
1n subframes indicated by higher layers to decode P2@D! when '6+:> > N ! a -, may assume that @*1 is e0ual to the
alue of the higher layer parameter non#)/*3NreionLenth ''4.
.1.4 ,*(; assi"nment procedure
*or each sering cell! higher layer signalling can configure a -, with one or two ,P+@@D"P>"sets for ,P+@@Dmonitoring. The P>"pairs corresponding to an ,P+@@D"P>"set are indicated by higher layers as described in
subclause 5.'.<.<. ,ach ,P+@@D"P>"set consists of set of ,@@,s numbered from 6 to '!!,@@, −" p N where
" p N !!,@@, is the number of ,@@,s in ,P+@@D"P>"set p of subframe " . ,ach ,P+@@D"P>"set can be
configured for either locali&ed ,P+@@D transmission or distributed ,P+@@D transmission.
The -, shall monitor a set of ,P+@@D candidates on one or more actiated sering cells as configured by higher layersignalling for control information! where monitoring implies attempting to decode each of the ,P+@@Ds in the setaccording to the monitored +@1 formats.
The set of ,P+@@D candidates to monitor are defined in terms of ,P+@@D -,"specific search spaces.
*or each sering cell! the subframes in which the -, monitors ,P+@@D -,"specific search spaces are configured by
higher layers.
The -, shall not monitor ,P+@@D
" *or T++ and normal downlink @P! in special subframes for the special subframe configurations 6 and 7 shownin Table <."' of 34.
" *or T++ and e%tended downlink @P! in special subframes for the special subframe configurations 6! < and =shown in Table <."' of 34.
" 1n subframes indicated by higher layers to decode P2@D.
" *or T++ and if the -, is configured with different -:F+: configurations for the primary and a secondary cell!in a downlink subframe on the secondary cell when the same subframe on the primary cell is a special subframe
and the -, is not capable of simultaneous reception and transmission on the primary and secondary cells.
/n ,P+@@D -,"specific search space)( L
" * at aggregation leel { }3!'9!?!<!!'∈ L is defined by a set of
,P+@@D candidates.
*or an ,P+@@D"P>"set p ! the ,@@,s corresponding to ,P+@@D candidate m of the search space)( L
" * are gien
by
i L N + ) L
N mH L " p L
p
" p CC
" p +
+
⋅⋅
+ Fmod)(!!,@@,)(
!!
!
where
" pH ! is defined below!
6! ! 'i L= −L
C0 n = if the -, is configured with a carrier indicator field for the sering cell on which ,P+@@D is monitored!
otherwise 6=+
C0 n is the carrier indicator field alue!
'!'!6 )( −= L
p ) m !
1f the -, is not configured with a carrier indicator field for the sering cell on which ,P+@@D is monitored!)( L
p ) is
the number of ,P+@@D candidates to monitor at aggregation leel L in ,P+@@D"P>"set p for the sering cell on
which ,P+@@D is monitored! as gien in Tables 5.'.<"'a! 5.'.<"'b! 5.'.<"a! 5.'.<"b! 5.'.<"3a! 5.'.<"3b! 5.'.<"<a!
5.<.<"<b! 5.'.<"7a! 5.'.<"7b below otherwise!)( L
p ) is the number of ,P+@@D candidates to monitor at aggregation
leel L in ,P+@@D"P>"set p for the sering cell indicated by C0 n .
Bote that the carrier indicator field alue is the same as *ervCell0nde& gien in ''4.
/ -, is not e%pected to monitor an ,P+@@D candidate! if an ,@@, corresponding to that ,P+@@D candidate ismapped to a P> pair that oerlaps in fre0uency with a transmission of either P>@D or primary or secondarysynchroni&ation signals in the same subframe.
1f a -, is configured with two ,P+@@D"P>"sets with the same,P+@@D1+ ,in alue (where
,P+@@D1+ ,in is defined in
subclause 9.'6.3/.' in 34)! if the -, receies an ,P+@@D candidate with a gien +@1 payload si&e corresponding toone of the ,P+@@D"P>"sets and mapped only to a gien set of ,s (as described in subclause 9.?/.7 in 34)! and ifthe -, is also configured to monitor an ,P+@@D candidate with the same +@1 payload si&e and corresponding to theother ,P+@@D"P>"set and which is mapped only to the same set of ,s! and if the number of the first ,@@, of the
receied ,P+@@D candidate is used for determining P-@@D resource for D/E"/@C transmission (as described insubclause '6.'. and subclause '6.'.3)! the number of the first ,@@, shall be determined based on ,P+@@D"P>"set
6= p .
The ariable " pH ! is defined by
DH AH " p p" p mod'!! −⋅=
where 6BT1'! ≠=− nH p ! 35?=6 = A ! 35?5' = A ! 9773== D and s " n= ! sn is the slot number within a
radio frame. The BT1 alue used for BT1n is defined in subclause =.' in downlink and subclause ? in uplink. The
+@1 formats that the -, shall monitor depend on the configured transmission mode per each sering cell as defined insubclause =.'.
The aggregation leels defining the search spaces and the number of monitored ,P+@@D candidates is gien as follows
" *or a -, configured with only one ,P+@@D"P>"set for distributed transmission! the aggregation leelsdefining the search spaces and the number of monitored ,P+@@D candidates are listed in Table 5.'.<"'a! Table5.'.<"'b.
" *or a -, configured with only one ,P+@@D"P>"set for locali&ed transmission! the aggregation leels definingthe search spaces and the number of monitored ,P+@@D candidates are listed in Table 5.'.<"a! Table 5.'.<"b.
" *or a -, configured with two ,P+@@D"P>"sets for distributed transmission! the aggregation leels definingthe search spaces and the number of monitored ,P+@@D candidates are listed in Table 5.'.<"3a! 5.'.<"3b.
" *or a -, configured with two ,P+@@D"P>"sets for locali&ed transmission! the aggregation leels defining thesearch spaces and the number of monitored ,P+@@D candidates are listed in Table 5.'.<"<a! 5.<.<"<b.
" *or a -, configured with one ,P+@@D"P>"set for distributed transmission! and one ,P+@@D"P>"set forlocali&ed transmission! the aggregation leels defining the search spaces and the number of monitored ,P+@@D
candidates are listed in Table 5.'.<"7a! 5.'.<"7b.
1f the -, is not configured with a carrier indicator field for the sering cell on which ,P+@@D is monitored!+: +:
> >L N N = of the sering cell on which ,P+@@D is monitored. 1f the -, is configured with a carrier indicator field
for the sering cell on which ,P+@@D is monitored!+: +:
" for special subframes with special subframe configuration 3!<!? and normal downlink @P when +@1 formats
F/F>F@F+ are monitored and+:
>L 7 N ≥ ! or
" for normal subframes and normal downlink @P when +@1 formats '/F'>F'+F'FF/F>F@F+F6F<F7 are
monitored! and when '6<,P+@@D <n ( ,P+@@Dn defined in subclause 9.?/.' in 34)! or
" for special subframes with special subframe configuration 3! <! ? and normal downlink @P when +@1 formats
'/F'>F'+F'F/FF>F@F+F6F<F7 are monitored! and when '6<,P+@@D <n ( ,P+@@Dn defined in subclause
9.?/.' in 34)
" @ase applies
" for normal subframes and e%tended downlink @P when +@1 formats '/F'>F'+F'F/FF>F@F+F6F<F7 aremonitored or!
" for special subframes with special subframe configuration '!!9!=!5 and normal downlink @P when +@1formats '/F'>F'+F'F/FF>F@F+F6F<F7 are monitored ! or
" for special subframes with special subframe configuration '!!3!7!9 and e%tended downlink @P when +@1
formats '/F'>F'+F'F/FF>F@F+F6F<F7 are monitored
" otherwise
" @ase 3 is applied.
p 7 N > is the number of P>"pairs constituting ,P+@@D"P>"set p .
Table 9.1.4-1a: =PD< a!"a%es *o!"%ore b a &=(;!e D"s%r"b$%e =PD<-PR-se% - ase1 ase 2)
1f a -, is configured for ,P+@@D monitoring! and if the -, is configured with a carrier indicator field! then the -,shall monitor one or more ,P+@@D -,"specific search spaces at each of the aggregation leels gien by Tables 5.'.<"'a to 5.'.<"7b on one or more actiated sering cells as configured by higher layer signalling.
/ -, configured with the carrier indicator field associated with monitoring ,P+@@D on sering cell c shall monitor,P+@@D configured with carrier indicator field and with @@ scrambled by @"BT1 in the ,P+@@D -, specific
search space of sering cell c./ -, configured with the carrier indicator field associated with monitoring ,P+@@D on the primary cell shall monitor
,P+@@D configured with carrier indicator field and with @@ scrambled by SPS @"BT1 in the ,P+@@D -, specificsearch space of the primary cell.
*or the sering cell on which ,P+@@D is monitored! if the -, is not configured with a carrier indicator field! it shallmonitor the ,P+@@D -, specific search space for ,P+@@D without carrier indicator field! if the -, is configuredwith a carrier indicator field it shall monitor the ,P+@@D -, specific search space for ,P+@@D with carrier indicator
field.
/ -, is not e%pected to monitor the ,P+@@D of a secondary cell if it is configured to monitor ,P+@@D with carrierindicator field corresponding to that secondary cell in another sering cell. *or the sering cell on which ,P+@@D ismonitored! the -, shall monitor ,P+@@D candidates at least for the same sering cell.
/ -, configured to monitor ,P+@@D candidates in a gien sering cell with a gien +@1 format si&e with @1*! and@@ scrambled by @" BT1! where the ,P+@@D candidates may hae one or more possible alues of @1* for thegien +@1 format si&e! shall assume that an ,P+@@D candidate with the gien +@1 format si&e may be transmitted inthe gien sering cell in any ,P+@@D -, specific search space corresponding to any of the possible alues of @1* forthe gien +@1 format si&e.
*or the sering cell on which ,P+@@D is monitored! a -, is not re0uired to monitor the ,P+@@D in a subframewhich is configured by higher layers to be part of a positioning reference signal occasion if the positioning referencesignal occasion is only configured within 2>S*B subframes and the cyclic prefi% length used in subframe V6 is normalcyclic prefi%.
/ -, may assume the same initc alue (described in subclause 9.'6.3/.' of 34) is used for antenna ports '6=!'6?
while monitoring an ,P+@@D candidate associated with either antenna port '6= or antenna port '6?./ -, may assume the same initc alue (described in subclause 9.'6.3/.' of 34) is used for antenna ports '65!''6
while monitoring an ,P+@@D candidate associated with either antenna port '65 or antenna port ''6.
.1.4.1 ,*(; startin" position
*or a gien sering cell! if the -, is configured ia higher layer signalling to receie P+S@D data transmissionsaccording to transmission modes '"5!
O if the -, is configured with a higher layer parameter epdcch#*tart*=mol#r$$!
o the starting M*+2 symbol for ,P+@@D gien by inde% t,P+@@DStar l in the first slot in a subframe is
determined from the higher layer parameter!
O otherwise
o the starting M*+2 symbol for ,P+@@D gien by inde% t,P+@@DStar l in the first slot in a subframe is
gien by the @*1 alue in the subframe of the gien sering cell when '6+:> > N ! and t,P+@@DStar l is
gien by the @*1 alueJ' in the subframe of the gien sering cell when '6+:> ≤ N
*or a gien sering cell! if the -, is configured ia higher layer signalling to receie P+S@D data transmissionsaccording to transmission mode '6! for each ,P+@@D"P>"set! the starting M*+2 symbol for monitoring ,P+@@D
in subframe " is determined from the higher layer parameter pdsch#*tart#r$$ (defined in subclause 5.'.<.3) as follows
O if the alue of the parameter pdsch#*tart#r$$ belongs to '!!3!<U,
o t DCC-*tar l K is gien by the higher layer parameter pdsch#*tart#r$$
o t DCC-*tar l K is gien by the @*1 alue in subframe " of the gien sering cell when '6+:> > N ! and
t DCC-*tar l K is gien by the @*1 alueJ' in subframe " of the gien sering cell when '6+:> ≤ N
O if subframe " is indicated by the higher layer parameter msfn#*uframeConfiList#r$$ (defined in subclause
5.'.<.3)! or if subframe " is subframe ' or 9 for frame structure type !
o )K!min( t DCC-*tar t DCC-*tar l l = !
O otherwise
o K
t,P+@@DStar t,P+@@DStar l l = .
.1.4.2 Antenna ports Cuasi co%location for ,*(;
*or a gien sering cell! if the -, is configured ia higher layer signalling to receie P+S@D data transmissionsaccording to transmission modes '"5! and if the -, is configured to monitor ,P+@@D!
" the -, may assume the antenna ports 6 ; 3! '6= ; ''6 of the sering cell are 0uasi co"located (as defined in 34)with respect to +oppler shift! +oppler spread! aerage delay! and delay spread.
*or a gien sering cell! if the -, is configured ia higher layer signalling to receie P+S@D data transmissionsaccording to transmission mode '6! and if the -, is configured to monitor ,P+@@D! for each ,P+@@D"P>"set!
" if the -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+S@D according to 0uasi co"location Type"/ as described insubclause =.'.'6
" the -, may assume the antenna ports 6 ; 3! '6= ; ''6 of the sering cell are 0uasi co"located (as defined in34) with respect to +oppler shift! +oppler spread! aerage delay! and delay spread.
" if the -, is configured by higher layers to decode P+S@D according to 0uasi co"location Type"> as described insubclause =.'.'6
" the -, may assume antenna ports '7 ; corresponding to the higher layer parameter cl#C*0#R*#
ConfiN?0d#r$$ (defined in subclause 5.'.<.3) and antenna ports '6="''6 are 0uasi co"located (as defined in34) with respect to +oppler shift! +oppler spread! aerage delay! and delay spread.
.1.4.3 Resource mappin" parameters for ,*(;
*or a gien sering cell! if the -, is configured ia higher layer signalling to receie P+S@D data transmissionsaccording to transmission mode '6! and if the -, is configured to monitor ,P+@@D! for each ,P+@@D"P>"set! the-, shall use the parameter set indicated by the higher layer parameter re#)appin5CL#Confi0d#r$$ for determiningthe ,P+@@D , mapping (defined in subclause 9.?/.7 of 34) and ,P+@@D antenna port 0uasi co"location. The
following parameters for determining ,P+@@D , mapping (as described in subclause 9.?/.7 of 34) and ,P+@@Dantenna port 0uasi co"location are included in the parameter set#
# crs#ortsCount#r$$.
# crs#3re*hift#r$$.
# msfn#*uframeConfiList#r$$.
# csi#R*#Confi?0d#r$$.
# pdsch#*tart#r$$.
# cl#C*0#R*#ConfiN?0d#r$$.
" csi#R*#Confi?0d#*econd#r$% if the -, is configured with @S1 subframe sets @S1!6C and @S1!'C by the higher
layer parameter csi#*uframeatternConfi#r$% for the sering cell.
.2 *(;',*(; validation for semi%persistent schedulin"
/ -, shall alidate a Semi"Persistent Scheduling assignment P+@@D only if all the following conditions are met#
" the @@ parity bits obtained for the P+@@D payload are scrambled with the Semi"Persistent Scheduling @"
BT1
" the new data indicator field is set to K6K. 1n case of +@1 formats ! /! >! @ and +! the new data indicatorfield refers to the one for the enabled transport block.
/ -, shall alidate a Semi"Persistent Scheduling assignment ,P+@@D only if all the following conditions are met#
" the @@ parity bits obtained for the ,P+@@D payload are scrambled with the Semi"Persistent Scheduling @"BT1
" the new data indicator field is set to K6K. 1n case of +@1 formats ! /! >! @ and +! the new data indicatorfield refers to the one for the enabled transport block.
$alidation is achieed if all the fields for the respectie used +@1 format are set according to Table 5."' or Table 5."
'/.
1f alidation is achieed! the -, shall consider the receied +@1 information accordingly as a alid semi"persistent
actiation or release.
1f alidation is not achieed! the receied +@1 format shall be considered by the -, as haing been receied with anon"matching @@.
Table 9.2-1: S,e"al f"els for Se*"-Pers"s%e!% Se$l"!# %"a%"o! PD<=PD< Val"a%"o!
D/ for*a% 0 D/ for*a% 11D/ for*a%
22222D
TP o**a! for se$le P&S< set to B--B 7'A 7'A
l" s"f% D+ RS set to B---B 7'A 7'A
+o$la%"o! a! o"!# se*ea! re$!a! ers"o! S8 is set to B-B 7'A 7'A
<R@ ,roess !$*ber 7'AF((> set to B---B!((> set to B----B
F((> set to B---B!((> set to B----B
+o$la%"o! a! o"!# se*e 7'A S8 is set to B-BFor the enabled transport bloc#>
S8 is set to B-B
Re$!a! ers"o! 7'A set to B--BFor the enabled transport bloc#>
set to B--B
Table 9.2-1: S,e"al f"els for Se*"-Pers"s%e!% Se$l"!# Release PD<=PD< Val"a%"o!
*or the case that the +@1 format indicates a semi"persistent downlink scheduling actiation! the TP@ command forP-@@D field shall be used as an inde% to one of the four P-@@D resource alues configured by higher layers! with themapping defined in Table 5."
Table 9.2-2: P&< reso$re al$e for o!l"!A se*"-,ers"s%e!% se$l"!#
Val$e of FTP o**a!
for P&<F)!'(
P-@@D
p
nB--B !he first *+; resource value confi"ured by the hi"her layers
B-1B !he second *+; resource value confi"ured by the hi"her layers
B1-B !he third *+; resource value confi"ured by the hi"her layers
B11B !he fourth *+; resource value confi"ured by the hi"her layers
.3 *(;',*(; control information procedure
/ -, shall discard the P+@@DF,P+@@D if consistent control information is not detected.
